You are on page 1of 2020

Mx8000 IDT Family

Service Manual

4550 193 01721


Revision E

This document and the information contained in it is proprietary and confidential information of Philips Medical Systems (Philips) and may not be reproduced,
copied in whole or in part, adapted, modified, disclosed to others, or disseminated without the prior written permission of the Philips Legal Department. Use of this
document and the information contained in it is strictly reserved for current Philips personnel and Philips customers who have a current and valid license from
Philips for use by the customers designated in-house service employee on equipment located at the customers designated site. Use of this document by unauthorized
persons is strictly prohibited. Report violation of these requirements to the Philips Legal Department. This document must be returned to Philips when the user is
no longer licensed and in any event upon Philips first written request.

2006 Philips Medical Systems


Philips Medical Systems
2006 KONINKLIJKE PHILIPS ELECTRONICS N. V. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Warranty Disclaimer
PHILIPS PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER IMPLIED OR EXPRESSED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Limitation of Liability
PHILIPS HAS TAKEN CARE TO ENSURE THE ACCURACY OF THIS DOCUMENT. HOWEVER, PHILIPS ASSUMES NO
LIABILITY FOR ERRORS OR OMISSIONS AND RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MAKE CHANGES WITHOUT FURTHER NOTICE
TO ANY PRODUCTS HEREIN TO IMPROVE RELIABILITY, FUNCTION, OR DESIGN. PHILIPS MAY MAKE IMPROVEMENTS
OR CHANGES IN THE PRODUCT(S) OR PROGRAM(S) DESCRIBED IN THIS DOCUMENT AT ANY TIME.
Symbol Descriptions

Attention symbol Radiation warning symbol

Laser warning symbol Biohazard warning symbol

Magnetism warning symbol Projectile warning symbol

Electrical warning symbol Do not touch


Revision History

ECO # Revision Date Comments


R20020009 0 May, 2002 New Release
E20030026 A Mar. 2003 Chap. 1
Laser Warning Section revised

Chap. 2
Host parts replacement added
Host memory upgrade added
IRS Intel functionality and specifications added

Chap. 3
System Hardwired Signals diagram and tables added
DPU - Power Supply added to Rotating overview added to all parts
replacement
Parts replacement added
RCOM LED functionality added
Full DMS replacement section added
DMS Connectors and Signals section moved to Chapter 9 Cables

Chap. 4
Changes to E-Box Replacement

Chap. 5
New R711 Potentiometer replacement procedure
Chap. 6
UPS Functional Description added
UPS Diagnostic section added
Chap. 7
New WCS controller
New water filling procedure
WCS parts replacement section added

Chap. 8
Networking for Windows XP operating system revised
Network block diagram revised
Network Troubleshooting section added
ECO # Revision Date Comments
Chap. 9
Cable drawings and pin layout added

Chap. 10
System Options chapter revised
Chap. 12
Service Tools chapter revised. Tools added from v2.016 and v.25

Chap. 13
Chapter CANpro added

Chap. 14
Chapter Software Installation added
E20040012 B January 2004 Introduction
FSE toolkit updated
Definitions and Abbreviations updated
Safety
Gantry cover microswitches updated
Power up and power down procedures of PDC
Treatment of torque wrenches

Operating Station
Periodic EOD Cartridge Maintenance
Intercom Function Block Diagram (New Version) added
Dell 650 computer added
Host Computer block diagram updated
Host Computer troubleshooting updated
Host parts replacement updated
SCSI Raid Disk Handling added
IRS parts replacement added
ECO # Revision Date Comments
Gantry
Slip Ring Maintenance added
Tilt converter updated
Rotation converter updated
Figures and block diagrams updated
NOISEFILT board added
Laser Light marker adjustment procedures corrected
NOISEFILT upgrade and replacement procedures added
Fil\RAC parts replacement procedure updated
New three-way valve including parts replacement
Log on and log off procedures added before all parts replacement
WCS
General description updated
Water filling procedure updated
Cables
Pin layouts for cables W357, W373, W362 added

System Options
12nc P/Ns updated for all options
Remote Monitor option added
AMC-4 option added
Teal option added
Link to PinPoint option on SVCINFO added

System Functions
Section on Data Path Troubleshooting added

Service Software Tools


Chapter reorganized

Software Installation Section removed


ECO # Revision Date Comments
E20040033 A March 2004 Document number changed from 4535 670 16211 to
4550 193 01721

System Block Diagram added

Operating Station
Dell 650 as FRU
SCSI Raid Disk Handling procedure updated
Host Computer Parts Replacement updated
IRS with Pentium 4 Motherboard added
Common Console option added
Gantry
Figures and block diagrams updated
Gantry Rotor Light Marker alignment procedure updated

X-ray System
E606 Power Supply Replacement Procedure updated
System Options
Dual Monitor option updated
24GB Memory option updated
RapidView 20 / CV Pro / CV Expert Option added
Mx8000 IDT Upgrade option 10-16 added

System Functions
Rotor Balancing Procedure added

Service software Tools


Visual Diagnostic test added
SCSI Disk test updated
SCSI Disk Destructive test added
Diagnostic Server added
E20040069 B July 2004 Operating Station
Intercom Function Block Diagram (New Version) updated
Computer Rack Block Diagram updated
IRS Functional Description updated
Scan Control Box Replacement added
ECO # Revision Date Comments
Gantry
Stationary and Rotating Functional Descriptions and parts
replacement procedures updated
Slip Ring Replacement Procedure added

Patient Table
Functional Description updated

Cables
Pin layouts for cables updated

System Options
Installing License Keys instructions added
Continuous CT Option Installation updated
2GB4GB Memory Upgrade Option updated
Remote Slave Monitor Option updated
Swedish Language Support added
RapidView 20 / CV Pro / CV Expert Option updated

System Functions
CANpro V9.0 Installation and Users Guide added
Data Path Troubleshooting updated

Network Installation and Configuration


Network Block Diagram updated
Tips for Configuring the HIS/RIS added

E20050001 C January 2005 Slip Ring Assembly


Slip Ring Replacement Procedure updated
Replacing the LPS Board added

Gantry Stationary Parts Replacement


Replacement and Adjustment of the Stator Laser Light Markers
updated

System Options
System Option chapter removed

Network Installation and Configuration


Network Installation and Configuration removed
ECO # Revision Date Comments
H2011689 D August 2005 X-ray System
Gantry Status Window added to X-ray tube oil temperature
measurement
Updated Data Path Troubleshooting chapter
Added Covers Replacement Section

H2012527 E February 2006 Added Replacing the Battery for Dell 650 and Dell 530
Added Replacing the Battery for IRS computers including
replacement figures and updated BIOS settings
Added Replacing the Back Projection (BP) Card for IRS Pentium 4
Removed Section Service Tools

This document was prepared by the CT PMG Haifa Service Innovation Department.
For any additions, corrections, or suggestions, contact:
CT PMG Haifa Customer Support Department
E-mail: _1HFA_Support_e2@philips.com
Safety Information
To the User of This Manual
The user of this manual is directed to read and carefully review the instructions, warnings and cautions contained herein prior to beginning installation or service activities.
While you may have previously installed or serviced equipment similar to that described in this manual, changes in design, manufacture or procedure may have occurred
which significantly affect the present installation or service.

Installation and Environment


Except for installations requiring certification by the manufacturer per federal standards, see that a radiation protection survey is made by a qualified expert in accordance
with NCRP 102, section 7, as revised or replaced in the future. Perform a survey after every change in equipment, workload, or operating conditions which might
significantly increase the probability of persons receiving more than the maximum permissible dose equivalent.

Diagnostic Imaging Systems - Mechanical-electrical Warning


All of the moveable assemblies and parts of this equipment should be operated with care and routinely inspected in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations
contained in the equipment manuals.
Only properly trained and qualified personnel should be permitted access to any internal parts. Live electrical terminals are deadly; be sure line disconnects are opened and
other appropriate precautions are taken before opening access doors, removing enclosure panels, or attaching accessories.
Do not under any circumstances, remove the flexible high tension cables from the x-ray tube housing or high tension generator and/or the access covers from the generator
until the main and auxiliary power supplies have been disconnected. Failure to comply with the above may result in serious or fatal bodily injuries to the operator or those
in the area.

Electrical-grounding Instructions
The equipment must be grounded to an earth ground by a separate conductor. The neutral side of the line is not to be considered the earth ground. On equipment
provided with a line cord, the equipment must be connected to properly grounded, three-pin receptacle. Do not use a three-to-two pin adapter.

Diagnostic Imaging Systems - Radiation Warning


X-ray and Gamma-rays are dangerous to both operator and others in the vicinity unless established safe exposure procedures are strictly observed.
The useful and scattered beams can produce serious or fatal bodily injuries to any persons in the surrounding area if used by an unskilled operator. Adequate precautions
must always be taken to avoid exposure to the useful beam, as well as to leakage radiation from within the source housing or to scattered radiation resulting from the
passage of radiation through matter.
Those authorized to operate, participate in or supervise the operation of the equipment must be thoroughly familiar and comply completely with the current established
safe exposure factors and procedures described in publications, such as: Subchapter J of Title 21 of the Code of Federal Regulations, "Diagnostic X-ray Systems and Their
Major Components", and the national council on radiation protection (NCRP) no. 102, "Medical X-ray And Gamma-ray Protection For Energies Up To 10 Mev-
equipment Design and Use", as revised or replaced in the future.
Those responsible for planning of x-ray and gamma-ray equipment installations must be thoroughly familiar and comply completely with NCRP no. 49, "Structural
Shielding Design and Evaluation For Medical Of X-rays and Gamma-rays of Energies Up to 10 Mev", as revised and replaced in the future. Failure to observe these
warnings may cause serious or fatal bodily injuries to the operator or those in the area.
Add additional safety information as needed
Only qualified and system trained Philips service staff is allowed to perform service (installation, maintenance, quality assurance) on the Mx8000 IDT Family systems.
Make sure that the latest version of the service instructions are available. Read the corresponding instructions carefully prior to working on the system. For your own safety
and for more detailed safety information, refer only to the current version of the documents.
Use only specified tools and auxiliary materials. After finishing any service activity, ensure that all covers of the Mx8000 IDT Family, including the mylar gasket, are closed

Precautionary Measures Regarding Electrical Voltage


Before you start the procedure outlined in this manual, make sure that you read and understand the warnings listed below.

WARNING PRIOR TO ANY SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES INSIDE COMPONENTS:


SWITCH OFF THE SYSTEM AT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY, (USING THE ON-SITE ON-OFF
SWITCH) AND THE INTERNAL/EXTERNAL UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS).
MAKE SURE THAT NO OTHER PERSON CAN SWITCH ON POWER OR SWITCH OFF THE
SECURITY MEASURES, WHEN INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE OR SERVICE WORK ON THE
SYSTEM IS PERFORMED.

WARNING WHEN PERFORMING ANY PROCEDURE INSIDE THE PDC:


SWITCH OFF ALL EXTERNAL POWER, E.G. POWER FOR X-RAY WARNING LAMP.
PRIOR TO ANY INTERVENTION IN THE PDC, ALLOW AT LEAST FIVE MINUTES DISCHARGE
TIME AFTER THE LAST SCAN. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE LEVELS (>500V) MAY BE PRESENT
EVEN IF THE SYSTEM IS SWITCHED OFF.

WARNING IN ADDITION TO THE WARNINGS LISTED ABOVE, MAKE SURE TO FOLLOW ALL SAFETY
GUIDELINES AS DESCRIBED IN CHAPTER 1 OF THE MX8000 IDT FAMILY SERVICE MANUAL.
FAILURE TO DO SO CAN RESULT IN SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY.

CAUTION Always use an ESD protection wrist strap when servicing any component in the system.
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Service Manual Introduction

Service Manual Introduction 1-1

How this Manual is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1


Definitions and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Standard FSE Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

i
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Safety Guidelines

Safety Guidelines 2-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Precautions When Transporting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Service Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Attaching Screws and Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
System Specific Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) Anti-static Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

ii
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Covers Replacement

Covers Replacement 3-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Login/Logout Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Patient Table Covers Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Bellows/Vertical Electronics (D702) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Tabletop/Horizontal Electronics (D701) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Patient Table Upper Side Covers Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Gantry Top Cover Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Gantry Bottom Cover Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Gantry Front Cover Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Gantry Rear Cover Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

iii
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

System Overview Block Diagram

System Overview Block Diagram 4-1

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

iv
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Operating Station

Operating Station Overview 5-1

About the Operating Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Operator Console 5-2

Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
CT Box (Scan Control Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Scan Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Scan Control Box Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Sony EOD Model RMO-S561Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Computer Rack 5-25

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Multi-Outlet (PDUPower Distribution Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
SDB (Signal Distribution Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Switch Box (KVM Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Host Computer 5-37

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Dell 530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Dell 650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

v
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Host Computer Parts Replacement 5-90

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Computer Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Logout and Shutdown Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Login and Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
Opening the Computer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Closing the Computer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Replacing the Host Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Installing and Removing Expansion Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
Second 3.06GHz Microprocessor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
Host Computer Memory Upgrade (for Dell 530 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
Host Computer Memory Upgrade (for Dell 650 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151

IRS (Image Reconstruction System) 5-162

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162
Data Acquisition and Reconstruction Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163
IRS Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170
ACQ (Acquisitor) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-198
Back Projection Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-209

IRS Computer Parts Replacement 5-241

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-241
Computer Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-241
Logout and Shutdown Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-244
Login and Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-245
Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

vi
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Common Console Option 5-291

Common Console Block Diagram 5-292

Common Table 5-294

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-294

Host Computer Rack 5-296

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-296
Host Rack Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-297
PDUPower Distribution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-298
Host Computer Rack Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-299

Common Console Host Computer Functional Description 5-309

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-309
Host Computer Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-315

Common Image Reconstruction System (CIRS) 5-316

CIRS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-316


Network Connections Configuration for CIRS Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-335
Recon Software Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-337
Performance Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-341
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-349
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-393
Repair / Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-409
Appendix A: Server Setup Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-457

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

vii
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Appendix B: Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-459

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

viii
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Gantry

System Control 6-1

MCB Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1


CAN Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
System/CAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
CAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
System/Hardwired Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Slip Ring Assembly 6-15

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Slip Ring Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Slip Ring Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Slip Ring Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54

Gantry Stationary Overview 6-91

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91

Gantry Stationary Functional Description 6-93

Gantry Stationary Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93

Gantry Stationary Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 6-131

Testing the MCU_MCB Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-131

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

ix
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Testing the RTC_MCB Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-133


Testing the GPC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-135
Verifying Correct Water Hose Connections in the Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-137
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-138

Gantry Stationary Parts Replacement 6-142

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-142
Login/Logout Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-147
Replacing the Rotation Frequency Converter (E301) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-149
Replacing the Tilt Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152
Adjusting the Tilt Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-153
Replacing the Tilt Frequency Converter (E302) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-156
Replacing the MCU RTC Board (D301) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-158
Replacing the Tilt Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-160
Replacing the Old Three-Way Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-165
Replacing the New Three-Way Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-167
Replacing the GPC Board (D311) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-169
Removal and Installation of the Funnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-174
Replacing the Dehumidifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-177
Replacing the Noise Cancellation Board (D344) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-179
Replacing the Mic-Gan and Noise Cancellation Boards with the Noisefilt Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-181
Replacing the Brake Assembly (E322) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-194
Replacing the Transmitter and Receiver Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-196
Replacing the LPS Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-199
Funnel Installation (Figure 6-127) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-203

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

x
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Replacing the Gantry Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-204


Replacing the Heat Exchanger Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-206
Replacement and Adjustment of the Stator Laser Light Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-209

Gantry Rotating Overview 6-220

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-220

Gantry Rotating Functional Description 6-223

FOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-223
Rotating Laser Light Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-233
Ultra High Resolution (UHR) Collimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-235
Tube Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-238
ADU D513 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-240
230V AC Power Supply to the Gantry Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-253
DPU D540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-253

Gantry Rotating Parts Replacement 6-259

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-259
Login/Logout Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-260
Replacement of Rotor Laser Light Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-262
Replacement of the E606 Vega Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-268
Replacement of the C-Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-269
Replacing FOC D514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-273
Replacing the ADU D513 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-275
Replacing the DPU D540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-277

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xi
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Replacing the Tube Collimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-279


Replacing the X-Ray Tube Cooling Unit (E590) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-282
Replacing the Receiver Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-286

DMS (Data Measurement System) 6-292

DMS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-292


General Description of the DMS Main Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-298
RCOM Board DIP Switch S2/2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-338

DMS Parts Replacement 6-348

ESDAnti-Static Field Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-350


Login/Logout Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-358
DMS Field Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-360
DMS FRUs (Field Replacement Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-393

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xii
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

X-ray System

X-ray System Overview 7-1

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

X-ray System Functional Description 7-3

The Main Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3


Gantry Generator Power Supply (E606) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Power Supplies 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
The Electronic Box (E603) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Main Control Board (D400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
High Voltage Tank (E604) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Filament Power Board (D470) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Rotating Anode Control Board (D115) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

X-ray System Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 7-38

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
X-ray System FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
X-ray System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Can Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xiii
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

X-ray System Parts Replacement 7-66

Login/Logout Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66


Replacing the X-ray Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
Replacing the E603 Electronic Box (E-Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
Replacing the High Voltage (HV) Tank (E604) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-99
Replacing the E606 Vega Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-108
Replacing the Main Control Board (D400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-116
Replacing the FIL (D470)/RAC (D115) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-122
Replacing the X-Ray Tube Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-128
Replacing the Electronic Box Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-142
Replacing Fuses F4 and F5 in the Electronic Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-145

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xiv
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Patient Table

Patient Table Functional Description 8-1

The Main Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1


Horizontal Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Vertical Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

Patient Table Adjustment and Calibration 8-30

Patient Table Horizontal (PTH) Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30


Patient Table Vertical (PTV) Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38

Patient Table Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 8-45

Cleaning of the Couch Vertical Motor Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45

Patient Table Parts Replacement 8-47

Login/Logout Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47


Removing Table Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Bellows/Vertical Electronics (D702) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Tabletop/Horizontal Electronics (D701) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Table Lift Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Inverter for the Table Lift Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
PT Vertical Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70
Connect Switch S704 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xv
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Spindle Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76


Vertical Position Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
Horizontal Tabletop Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83
Tabletop Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87
Horizontal Motor for Tabletop Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90
PT Horizontal Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-93
Tabletop Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-96
Top Support Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-114
Upper Side Table Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-131

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xvi
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

PDC

PDC Functional Description 9-1

Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1


Direct Current Circuit (DCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Power Distribution System (PDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
PDC Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Direct Current Circuit (DCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xvii
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

WCS

WCS Functional Description 10-1

Water Cooling System (WCS) Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1


Water-Water Cooling Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Water-Air Cooling Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
WCS Waterto-Air Service Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

PDC Diagnostics 10-38

UPS Service Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

WCS Parts Replacement 10-45

Water-Water Cooling System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47


Water-Air Cooling System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Draining and Filling the Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Draining the Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Draining Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Additional Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Filling the Water Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Connecting the Filling Hoses (see Figure 10-29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Replacing the New Electric Actuator (SQS 85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Checking the Correct Pump Rotation in the Water Cooling System (WCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Replacing the Permanent Bleeding Valve (Water-Water only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Replacing the Coolant System (Water-Air only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xviii
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Replacing the Spirovent Bleeding Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67


Replacing the Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Replacing the Adjustment Drive in the WCS (Water-Water only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Replacing the 3-way Valve (Water-Water only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Replacing the Cooling Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Checking the Correct Pump Rotation in the Water Cooling System (WCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Replacing the Expansion Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Replacing the Flow Sensor (Water-Water only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Replacing the Filling and Draining Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Replacing the Shut-off Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92
Replacing the Temperature Sensor in the Air Inlet (Water-Air only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Replacing the Fan (Water-Air only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xix
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Cabling

Cabling Functional Description 11-1

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Gantry Stationary Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Gantry Rotating CablingX-ray Tube Akron Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Computer Rack Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
Ground Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39

Cable Drawings and Pin Layouts 11-42

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-42
Injector Cable Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-206
Cardiac Option Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-212

DMS Connectors and Signals 11-219

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xx
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

System Options

Mx8000 IDT System Options 12-1

Installing License Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xxi
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

System Functions

Stop Report 13-1

Stop Report Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Data Path Troubleshooting 13-8

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Tools for Troubleshooting problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Troubleshooting Images and Procedures 13-24

Using Bugrep for Viewing Error MCU 54 .......................................................................................... 13-24


Bad Patient Table Motion (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
LPS Board Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
System Memory Overflow (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Resent Problem (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
Transmitter Antenna (Slip Ring Antenna) Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33
Centering the Transmitter & Receiver Antenna (X and Y Direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37
Receiver Antenna (Slot Ring Antenna) Cleaning and Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
X-Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-43

Rotor Balancing Procedure 13-44

Functional Description 13-44

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xxii
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47
Estimated Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47

Rotor Balancing Procedure Overview 13-48

Signal Path Overview 13-49

Rotor Balance Procedure 13-52

Pre-Balancing Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-54


Verifying if the System was Previously Calibrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-60
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61
Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-69

Post-Balancing Activity 13-76

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xxiii
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

CANpro

CANpro Test Tool 14-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

CANpro 8.1 Service Instructions 15-2

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Folder Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Verifying the System IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Connecting the CANpro 8.1 to Host from Version 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Mx8000 IDT Open Bugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Long Tube Conditioning Procedure on Systems from Software Version 2.106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18

CANpro Version 8.1 Installation Instructions 15-21

introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
Uninstalling CANpro Secure 4.8 Diagnostic Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-24
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
Pre-Setup installation for Windows 98 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
Pre-setup Installation for Windows 2000 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-29
Installing CANpro Can Test Tool Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34
Ethernet Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-41
Network Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-47
Connecting to the Scanner for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-49

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xxiv
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Updating CANpro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-51

CANpro CAN V8.1 Test Tool Users Guide 15-54

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-54
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-61
Safety Aspects of Mx8000 IDT Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-70
CANpro User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-73
CAN Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-94
CANpro User Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-105
Flash Load and Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-107
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-117

CANpro V9 Installation Instructions 16-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Parts Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Pre-Setup Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Windows 98 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Windows 2000/XP Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Installing CANpro Can Test Tool Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
Removing a Previous Version of CANpro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
Install CANpro, Device Drivers, and Machine Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
Define Hardware for the Peak Can Device Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-26
Ethernet Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-34

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xxv
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-34
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-35
Network Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-40
Host Preparation for Appropriate Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-42
Synchronization Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-44
Synchronize with Mx8000 Dual and Quad CT- Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-45
CANpro 9.0 Hardware Peak CAN USB Dongle Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-49
Switching Between Hardware Peak CAN Parallel and Peak CAN USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-50
Specifications for Connecting to the Scanner for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-52
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-52
Diagnostic Program Folder Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-53
Folders Downloaded from Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-54
Scenarios Folder for Mx8000 IDT and Brilliance CT Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-55
List of Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-56
USB to PS2 Adapter for CT Service Laptops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-60
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-60
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-61

CANpro V9 Test Tool Users Guide 16-63

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-63
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-64
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-71
Verifying CANpro Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-71
How Does Canpro Run in Real-time on Windows 98/ME/NT/2000/XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-79
Safety Aspects of CANpro Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-81

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xxvi
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Thermal Load Calculator (Heat Calculator, TLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-82


Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-84
Shortcut Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-97
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-99
CAN Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-100
Gantry Status Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-103
CANpro User Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-113
Flash Load and Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-115
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-126

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xxvii
Mx8000 IDT
Service Manual Table of Contents

Electrical Line Inspection

Electrical Line Inspection 17-1

Test Procedure Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3

Electrical Line Inspection and Corrective Action Test Report 17-7

Measurement Checklist and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8


Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-14
Measured Values on PDC Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-21

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

xxviii
Service Manual Introduction

Service Manual Introduction

How this Manual is Organized


This manual provides the information necessary to service and maintain the Mx8000 IDT CT scanner. The manual is organized
in chapters according to the major system components.
Each chapter contains the following:
An engineering description of the subassemblies of each main component
Diagnostic and analytical tools and techniques for locating and troubleshooting problems
Detailed procedures for the replacement of all subassemblies (FRUs)

This manual is presented in landscape format for easy viewing on the Field Service Engineers computer. In addition to the
bookmarks displayed in Acrobat Reader, the user can take advantage of the Tables of Contents in the beginning of the manual
and at the start of each chapter. These navigation tools enable the FSE to find the necessary information quickly.

Definitions and Abbreviations


The following abbreviations are used in this chapter:

CT Terms
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
DFS Dynamic Focal Spot
FEE Front End Electronics
FFS Flying Focal Spot
PREP Pre-processed raw dataa step in the reconstruction
ODL Optical Data Link
RAW Header and Data of one scan
Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

1-1
Mx8000 IDT Preface
Service Manual Definitions and Abbreviations

Reading The values of all detectors received at the same angular and focal position
Row Detectors Row. The detector assembly is built from "n" rows of detectors where "n" is 2, 4, 8, or 16 rows.
Sample Single measurement by one detector element during an integration period
Sampling
Density Parameter describing the number of fans per rotation
Scan Process of taking measurement data (make_data signal is on).
Slice 672 Detectors along the X axis of the DMS, (with the same Z coordinate). The DMS has 16 Slices.
Subfan
time Integration time
Subfan/
Reading Set of samples measured in one integration period by one row
View/
Frame All the samples measured during one integration period for one row.

CT Sub-assemblies
ACQ Acquisition card, in the IRS, receives the measurement data (FEE data) from the DMS (RCOM card)
ADM Array Detector Moduleassembly of PDA + ADM_Card + AS + Support mechanics + Cables
ADMC Array Detector Module CardMx8000 IDT PCB with 8 ASICs and electronic components (excluding PDA)
ADU Acquisition Control and DOM Unit A board in the CBOXresponsible for the communication to DMS
AS Anti-Scatter collimator
CBOX Rotor control boxcontains the ADU, FOC and DPU cards
DAS Data Acquisition System (Detectors, ADMC boards and RCOM board)
DMB (MB) DMS motherboardconsisting of the LMB (Left) and RMB (Right)
DMS Data Measurement System
DOM Dose Modulation unitcontrols the current (mA) to the X-ray tube according to the shape of the anatomy
DPU Board in the C-BOX providing DC power to all the components on the Rotor (except for the HV tank and X-ray
tube)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

1-2
Mx8000 IDT Preface
Service Manual Definitions and Abbreviations

Host The Host computer


IRS Image Reconstruction Systemreceives the FEE data and reconstructs it to image
LMB Left DMS motherboard
RMB Right DMS motherboard
PDA Photodiode Array (silicon segmented array + MUX + Ceramics + Connector)
RCOM Communication and Control card in the DMS.
Ref_Conv Reference Converter, a unit that converts the reference detector analog readings into digital
TCC Temperature Control circuitry
UHR Ultra-High Resolution Collimator
XRS X-Ray System
XRT X-Ray Tube

General Terms
FDA U.S. Food and Drug Administration
CDRH Center of Devices and Radiological Hertz

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

1-3
Mx8000 IDT Preface
Service Manual Standard FSE Tool Kit

Standard FSE Tool Kit


The following table lists the standard tools necessary for servicing the Mx8000 IDT. Special tools required for specific
procedures are listed with those procedures.

P/N Description Qty


Local purchase Torque wrench 25-130 Nm with 1/2 Drive 1
Local purchase Fork wrench, size: 5, 17, 27, 32, 36 and 42. Set
Local purchase 1/2 Drive Ratchet 1
Local purchase 1/2 Drive Extension-Length 150 & 300 mm Set
Local purchase 1/2 Drive Allen bit socket set: 314 mm Set
Local purchase 1/2 Drive Hex socket set: 618 mm Set
Local purchase 1/2 flexible Water hoses 15m long (Same as for installation) 2
Local purchase 1/2 Tube clamps 2
Local purchase Set of Allen Keys, 1.510 mm Set
Local purchase Anti-static Vacuum Cleaner 1
453566495801 9.1 GB, 1024 Bytes/Sector Optical Cartridge 1
453566224761 Anti Static Kit 1
Local purchase 2.5mm Allen Hex socket for Drive 1
Local purchase Power bit Adapter driver 1/4" 1
Local purchase Set of TORX keys
Local purchase 2.0mm Allen Hex socket for Drive 1

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

1-4
Mx8000 IDT Preface
Service Manual Standard FSE Tool Kit

453566129281 H.V Dummy Plug 1


453566129261 Grease SOFLEX TOPAS NCA52 - By Kluber 1
Local purchase High pressure grease gun 1
Local purchase Heat sink grease 1
453566127411 Silicon Oil 1
453566127401 Silicon Washer 3P 2
Local purchase Set of Allen Keys, 1.5-10 mm(1) Set
Local purchase 1/4 Drive Hex bit socket set 2-6 mm Set
Local purchase Bit for flat screw M3 - Fits to 1/4 Drive 1
Local purchase Torque wrench 3-20 Nm with 3/8 Drive 1
Local purchase Torque wrench 10-50 Nm with 3/8 Drive 1
Local purchase Torque Screw Driver 40-200 Ncm with 1/4 Hex Drive 1
Local purchase Adapter for Torque Meter, from 3/8 to 1/4 Drive 1
Local purchase 1/4 Drive Extension - 50 and 150 mm length 1
Local purchase Torque wrench 25-130 Nm with 1/2 Drive(1) 1
Local purchase Open-end wrench, size: 27, 32, 36 and 42 Set
Local purchase 1/2 Drive Extension-Length 150 & 300 mm 2
Local purchase 1/2 Drive Hex bit socket set 7-14 mm Set
Local purchase 1/2 Drive socket set 6-18 mm Set
Local purchase Laptop for Advanced Diagnostics Software (2) (CANpro) and Service Documentation 1

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

1-5
Mx8000 IDT Preface
Service Manual Standard FSE Tool Kit

455016323011 Pin For Brush Block 2


455013900101 Sponge for Slip Ring Track Polishing 1
Local purchase Torque wrench 25-130 Nm with 1/2 Drive 1
Local purchase Fork wrench, size: 5, 17, 27, 32, 36 and 42. Set
Local purchase 1/2 Drive Allen bit socket set: 314 mm Set

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

1-6
Safety Guidelines

Safety Guidelines

Overview
This chapter describes safety precautions and procedures that will ensure the safety of everyone during servicing and operation
of the Mx8000 IDT system and includes the following sections:
General precautions to be observed at all times
Service precautions to be observed primarily when the equipment is serviced
Description of the warning labels

READ ALL SAFETY INFORMATION VERY CAREFULLY. THIS KNOWLEDGE COULD SAVE LIVES.

Left and right references are from the point of view of a person standing at the open end of the Patient Table, facing the Gantry
(see Figure 2-1).
2-1

Gantry

Patient
Left Right
Table

Person

Figure 2-1: Left and Right References

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-1
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

General Precautions
This product was designed and manufactured to ensure maximum safety of operation and service. It should be installed,
maintained, and serviced in strict compliance with the safety instructions contained herein.
No changes, additions, or removal of any system accessories are permitted without the prior written approval of a local
service manager.
Connect the product to the mains according to the wiring scheme in this manual.
Before beginning any clinical use, complete all safety checks in this manual.
Do not leave problems unsolved that may affect the safety of the product. In case of doubt concerning the system's safe
operation, call the service manager for further instruction.
Do not allow unauthorized personnel access to the system. Only properly trained and fully qualified personnel are
authorized to install and operate this equipment.
Leave the site clean and orderly.

Precautions When Transporting the System

WARNING
CRUSH HAZARDMINIMIZE THE CLEARANCE BETWEEN THE GANTRY / PATIENT TABLE BASE AND THE FLOOR WHEN
TRANSPORTING THE GANTRY. THIS WILL PREVENT EXCESS STRESS ON THE JACK SCREWS AND REDUCES THE
POSSIBILITY OF TRANSPORT DEVICE FAILURE (E.G. WHEN LIFTING) OR TIPPING THE GANTRY / PATIENT TABLE. FAILURE
TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

WARNING
A WHEEL OUTRIGGER SHOULD BE SPREAD TO MINIMIZE TIPPING HAZARD.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-2
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

WARNING
CRUSH HAZARDMINIMIZE THE CLEARANCE BETWEEN HEAVY FRU SUB-ASSEMBLIES (E.G. X-RAY TUBE, DMS) AND THE
FLOOR WHEN TRANSPORTING. THIS WILL PREVENT THE POSSIBILITY OF FRU ROLLOVER. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

General Service Safety Procedures and Information


Please keep the following in mind at all times:
1. The system has three red STOP buttons that halt all Gantry and Patient Table motion, as well as X-Ray generation. Two
buttons are on the Gantrys front cover, one on each side. The third is on the CT-Box connected to the Operating Console.

CAUTION
PRESSING THESE STOP BUTTONS DOES NOT DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY TO
THE SYSTEM.

2. Whenever you service the machine, remove everyone from the Gantry room who does not have to be there.
If you are not alone (you are working with another person):
Define who is in charge, and coordinate your work with the other person.
Say what you are going to do out loud, and make the other person confirm your declaration by repeating your words.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-3
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Service Mode Precautions


There is a special Service mode for diagnostic and service purposes in the Mx8000 IDT. It is accessed with a special password,
and is intended for service personnel only. When in Service mode, a red always-on-top banner is visible on the screen.
This Service mode enables access to more diagnostic tools and utilities than are available in User mode.
Service mode differs from User mode from the safety aspect as follows:
There is a set of software service-defined switches that allow changes in system behavior for diagnostic purposes.
There are diagnostic tests in semi-automatic mode that perform the following:
Scans without the need to press the Manual or Auto buttons on the CT Box.
Patient Table movement without the need to press the Enable button on the CT Box.

WARNING
THESE TESTS CAN CAUSE THE ROTOR TO ROTATE AND PERFORM SCANS, AND ENABLE PATIENT TABLE
MOVEMENT. MAKE SURE THAT NO ONE IS IN THE GANTRY ROOM WHEN PERFORMING THESE TESTS.

WARNING
IT IS FORBIDDEN TO SCAN PATIENTS WHEN IN SERVICE MODE BECAUSE OF THE DIFFERENCE IN BEHAVIOR OF THE
SYSTEM IN THIS MODE.

WARNING
BEFORE YOU RETURN THE SYSTEM TO THE CUSTOMER, DO AS FOLLOWS:
RETURN ALL SOFTWARE SERVICE-DEFINED SWITCHES TO THEIR DEFAULT SETTINGS.
PERFORM LOG OUT FROM THE SERVICE MODE.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-4
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Explanation of Symbols
Symbols used in the technical documents have the following meanings:

Measuring and adjusting work on parts which are under a voltage of >50 VAC or >120 DC.

Activities with radiation switched ON.

Safety-relevant screw connections.


Use only the (supplied) screw connections which are suitable for the intended purpose and
tighten with the specified torque.
Work with Lasers

Electrical Installations
Electrical installations of medically used rooms must be made in accordance with the requirements of each country.
The regulations must be taken from the installation sheets for the project concerned.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-5
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Installation of Electro-medical Systems and Equipment


All work must be carried out in accordance with the technical documentation.
Make sure that all protective ground wires provided by the manufacturer are connected properly before starting the equipment
after installation. This applies, for example, to all metallic covers which may develop a dangerous contact voltage in case of a
fault. They must always be connected to the protective ground wire. To ensure this, the connection between these covers and
the protective ground wire must be made with screws and contact washer or via the protective ground wires provided.

Means Terminal for connection of equipment protective ground


wire.

The protective ground wires must be connected between the system components and the power supply as shown in the wiring
diagram.
In the interest of protection for our personnel, the protective ground wires must be installed prior to first switching on the
product/system, as well as after completing all work, before turnover to the customer, in accordance with the product
documentation.
Perform the Electrical Line Inspection procedure before turning the system ON (see Electrical Line Inspection).

Personal Protection Measures (Occupational Safety)


The legally relevant and internal regulations and specifications concerning protection of labor and accident prevention must be
observed, primarily in the interest of the persons performing the work. The notes below are given as additional information.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-6
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Mandatory Reporting

The supervisor in charge must be notified at once in the event of an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an
accident.

CAUTION
WHEN PERFORMING WORK WITHIN THE DANGER AREA OF PRODUCTS, ANY
INVOLUNTARY UNIT MOVEMENTS MUST BE PREVENTED BY PREVIOUSLY ACTUATING
THE SERVICE SWITCH OR THE EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON

Working when Connected to Voltages

No work must be performed on current-carrying parts (>50 V ~ or 120 V).


The system must be de-energized by means of the EMERGENCY OFF switch.
This prohibition does not apply for measuring and adjustment procedures. Be careful when performing these procedures. Use
only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the respective procedure.
Test and adjustment points must be accessible without any risk of injury for the personnel. If this is not possible, switch OFF the
system.
If voltage must be applied during an operation, e.g., to perform unit movements, take every precaution especially when working
with moving and rotating parts. De-energize the unit immediately afterwards.
Do not attempt to modify or use the supplied AC power cord if it is not the exact type required. A product with
more than one power supply will have a separate AC power cord for each supply.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-7
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

The power button on the system does not turn off system AC power. To remove AC power from the system, you
must unplug each AC power cord from the wall outlet or power supply. The power cord(s) is considered the
disconnect device to the mains (AC) power. The socket outlet that the system plugs into shall be installed near
the equipment and shall be easily accessible.

For proper cooling and airflow, always reinstall the chassis covers before turning on the system. Operating the
system without the covers in place can damage system parts.

A microprocessor and heat sink may be hot if the system has been running. Also, there may be sharp pins and
edges on some board and chassis parts. Contact should be made with care. Consider wearing protective gloves.

Radiation Protection

Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is applied, the required protective
measures must be complied with in any event.

Laser Radiation

All lasers are classified by the manufacturer and labeled with the appropriate warning labels. Any modification of an existing /
unclassified laser must be classified by the Laser Safety Officer prior to use. The following criteria are used to classify lasers:
Wavelength. If the laser is designed to emit multiple wavelengths the classification is based on the most hazardous
wavelength.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-8
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

For Continuous Wave (CW) or repetitively pulsed lasers the average power output (Watts) and limiting exposure time
inherent in the design are considered.
For pulsed lasers the total energy per pulse, pulse duration, pulse repetition frequency and emergent beam radiant
exposure are considered.

There are four different classes of lasers. The lasers in our systems are:
Class1 - A Class 1 laser is considered safe based upon current medical knowledge. This class includes all lasers or laser
systems which cannot emit levels of optical radiation above the exposure limits for the eye under any exposure conditions
inherent in the design of the laser product. There may be a more hazardous laser embedded in the enclosure of a Class 1
product, but no harmful radiation can escape the enclosure
Class 2 (Visible Lasers: 540700 nm, peak power < 1mW)
Lasers emitting visible light not intended for viewing, and under normal operating conditions would not produce an injury to the
eye if viewed directly for less than 1000 seconds_ bar code scanners.
Class 3B - Lasers or laser systems that can produce a hazard if viewed directly. This includes intrabeam viewing of specular
reflections. A Class 3 laser or laser system can emit any wavelength, but it cannot produce a diffuse (not mirror-like) reflection
hazard unless focused or viewed for extended periods at close range. It is also not considered a fire hazard or serious skin
hazard. Any continuous wave (CW) laser that is not Class 1 or Class 2 is a Class 3 device if its output power is 0.5 W or less.
Since the output beam of such a laser is definitely hazardous for intrabeam viewing, control measures center on eliminating this
possibility.
References: http://www.laserinstitute.org

General Safety Precautions


Laser products may not be operated without the appropriate housing.
Only instructed co-workers are allowed to handle lasers. When working with lasers, observe all legal and product specific
regulations (T1 242).
Do not look directly into the laser beam or at its reflection on smooth, mirror-like surfaces.
Non-compliance with legal regulations can lead to bodily injury due to the hazardous effects of the laser beam.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-9
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Avoid eye exposure to direct reflections of the laser from any mirror-like reflective surfaces like waveguides or plated
metal.
Remove power from the transmitter electronics box when working in areas of the gantry where your eyes would be
exposed to laser energy.

Batteries

For replacement of batteries, special preventive measures apply. In the case of lithium batteries, there is as risk of explosion if
they are incorrectly installed. The notes concerning handling and disposal must be observed in each case.
Do not expose batteries to fire; they may explode.
Do not use a knife to destroy a battery. The released electrolyte is harmful to your skin and eyes.
Obey the following warnings when working with batteries:
Remove watches, rings, or other metal objects.
Use tools with insulated handles.
Wear rubber gloves and boots.
Do not place tools or metal parts on the batteries.
Disconnect charging source before connecting or disconnecting battery terminals.
Check whether the battery was carelessly grounded. If so, remove it immediately. Contacting with any part of a grounded
battery can result in electric shock.

Backup Battery

The lithium battery on the baseboard powers the real-time clock (RTC) for up to 10 years in the absence of power. When the
battery starts to weaken, it loses voltage, and the server settings stored in CMOS RAM in the RTC (for example, the date and
time) might be incorrect.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace with only the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-10
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Handling Heavy Loads

Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g., safety boots and gloves, care must be taken that heavy loads are
correctly lifted or carried to avoid any physical injury (e.g., injuring the spine).
The relevant instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by mechanical means or by several
persons.

Handling Hazardous Substances

Hazardous substance is the designation for materials which can ignite or explode or which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive
or irritating.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them are identified clearly by symbols and
described by the instructions appertaining to the hazardous substances.
Before they are handled, these instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with when
performing work to avoid health risks.
In addition, all relevant instructions in the documentation must be complied with.

Blood-borne Pathogens

WARNING
BIOHAZARD! INFECTION THROUGH BLOOD:
WHEN HANDLING PARTS THAT MAY HAVE COME INTO CONTACT WITH PATIENTS, TAKE APPROPRIATE ACTIONS AGAINST
EXPOSURE TO BLOOD-BORN PATHOGENS.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-11
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Service Precautions
Safety precautions must be taken before servicing the machine. It is the responsibility of the service engineer to ensure that
these precautions are taken to avoid any hazard.
There are four different kinds of potential hazards when servicing the system as follows:
Mechanical hazards
Electrical hazards
Radiation hazards
Thermal Hazards

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-12
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Precautions Against Mechanical Hazards

WARNING
ROTATING MACHINERY NEVER SERVICE THE ROTATING FRAME WHEN OR IF ROTATIONAL MOVEMENT IS ENABLED.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.

WARNING
THE ROTOR OF THE CONTAINS HEAVY PARTS, SUCH AS THE X-RAY TUBE, DMS, ETC., AND IS PERFECTLY BALANCED.
WHEN YOU DISTURB THIS BALANCE BY REMOVING A PART FROM IT, IT WILL START AN UNCONTROLLED MECHANICAL
MOTION TO REACH A NEW EQUILIBRIUM POINT. THIS MOTION CANNOT BE STOPPED AND MAY INJURE THE SERVICE
ENGINEER.

All rotor components must be secured with factory provided fasteners (bolts, washers, etc.) or equivalent.
Thread locker (242 Locktite or equivalent) must be applied to all threaded fasteners used to secure rotor components.
All threaded fasteners used to secure rotor components must be torqued per factory specifications. See torque chart in section
Tightening Torques for Screw Connections.
If you intend to remove a unit follow these precautions to prevent mechanical hazards:
a. Bring the Rotor to the position in which the unit can be removed.
b. Turn the S301 switch to the 0 (zero) position (located in the inner left side of the Gantry).
c. When the Rotor is not rotating, engage the rotor locking device (located on the front side of the Gantry at the 2 oclock
positionsee Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3).
d. Do not release the rotor locking device until the unit (or its replacement) is returned and fixed securely to the Rotor.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-13
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Figure 2-2: Location of Locking Pin Figure 2-3: Locking Pin Engaged

3. In its idle state, the system rotates most of the time; consider all units mounted on the rotor as flying units. If you fail to
fasten units to the Rotor securely or leave loose screws, units may detach from the Rotor and cause serious injury.
After servicing any unit, verify that all units and screws are attached securely in their correct places.
4. The Rotor has no fixed idle position, and even when it is not generating X-Rays it may start rotating. An uncontrolled,
electricity-driven rotation may cause serious injuries. Two microswitches in the front cover disable rotation each time the
front cover is opened. Rotation can be re-energized from the console. Switch S301 (on the left side of the Gantry), when
set to 0, is the only switch that completely disables rotation.

WARNING
POINT OF INJURY! SYSTEM COMPONENTS HAVE SHARP EDGES THAT MAY CAUSE INJURY OR DAMAGE TO SYSTEM
COMPONENTS (CABLES, ETC.).
USE PROTECTION WHEN WORKING ON SCANNER COMPONENTS.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-14
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

WARNING
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCE EVER BYPASS THE SAFETY, FRONT COVER AND S301 SWITCHES

WARNING
NEVER APPROACH THE GANTRY WHEN ROTATIONAL MOVEMENT IS ENABLED.

Gantry Tilt (Forward/Backward)


When performing tilt be sure to distance yourself as much as possible from the system.
Follow these guidelines:
Preferably perform procedures with Gantry covers closed.
Beware of relative motion between the fixed and moving elements in the Gantry.
Locate and recognize the emergency stops on the Gantry and the Operating Console before performing any procedure.

Patient Table (In/Out, Up/Down)


When performing the following actions be sure to distance yourself as much as possible from the system:
Patient Table horizontal movement (in/out)
Patient Table vertical movement (up/down)

Follow these guidelines:


When performing Patient Table movement beware of limbs or clothing getting caught in the stretcher area or in the
scissors.
Beware of relative motion between the fixed and moving elements in the Patient Table.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-15
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Employ the safety brace when performing procedures on the Patient Table lift mechanism.

Working with System Phantoms

WARNING
COLLISION HAZARD! WHEN MOUNTING THE PHANTOM MAKE SURE THAT IT IS POSITIONED SO THAT IT WILL NOT COME
IN CONTACT WITH THE GANTRY COVERS OR THE ROTOR.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-16
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Precautions Against Electrical Hazards


The following precautions prevent electrical hazards:
1. Being a continuous rotating scanner means that the power is transmitted to the rotating part by mechanical slip rings. Over
the slip rings there are line voltages. Removing the rear cover exposes the Slip Ring (with high DC and AC power voltage
lines) and the brush blocks.

WARNING
FRONT END ELECTRONICS IS ENERGIZED THROUGH THE SLIP RINGS EVEN WHEN YOU SWITCH OFF THE SYSTEM.
THEREFORE, BEFORE YOU REMOVE THE REAR COVER, TO AVOID ANY ELECTRICAL DANGER, SWITCH OFF ALL CIRCUIT
BREAKERS ON THE POWER DISTRIBUTION CABINET (PDC), AND ON THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY TO THE SCANNER.
WAIT FOR AT LEAST FIVE MINUTES FOR ELECTRICITY TO BE DISCHARGED.

2. The Computer Rack receives power from an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) located in the Power Distribution
Cabinet (PDC). This means that parts inside this unit continue to receive line voltages, even after the console or the
various circuit breakers are switched OFF.
Before accessing these units, switch OFF the power from the UPS by pressing the OFF push button and disconnect the
power cables from the PDC that are connected to the Computer Rack.
3. Line voltages are always present in the Gantrys left leg. Therefore, make sure that the left leg cover is always closed,
unless otherwise necessary for service.
4. Remember that the PDC is energized even when the system is OFF. Therefore, always keep the door of the PDC
closed. When you must service the PDC, first disconnect the main on-site power supply.
5. The system has large capacitors. Therefore, wait five minutes after disconnecting the power to the system and verifying
the 2 yellow LEDs on the D450 (in the PDC) are OFF, before servicing the high voltage (HV) system on the Rotor and in
the PDC.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-17
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

WARNING
ENSURE THAT ALL EXTERNAL POWER CABLES FOR SYSTEM OPTIONS SUCH AS ECG MONITOR, CCT INJECTOR, ETC. ARE
SHIELDED.

Electrically Hazardous Areas in the Gantry

Gantry left leg


Gantry right leg
High voltage power supply
FRC assembly located to the right of the X-ray tube

WARNING
THERE ARE VOLTAGES THAT DISCHARGE SLOWLY (TWO MINUTES). WAIT FOR THE CAPACITOR DISCHARGE IN THE
FOLLOWING COMPONENTS:
SLIP RING SUBASSEMBLY - POWER SLIP RING 480VAC
HIGH VOLTAGE AREA OF THE GANTRY

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-18
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Precautions Against Radiation Hazards

WARNING
WALLS MUST BE COATED WITH LEAD TO BLOCK STRAY RADIATION AT VARYING DISTANCES FROM THE CENTER OF THE
PHANTOM.

WARNING
ALL NECESSARY RADIATION PROTECTION MEASURES MUST BE PERFORMED PRIOR TO RELEASING RADIATION.
ALL PERSONNEL WORKING ON THE INSTALLATION MUST WEAR A DOSIMETER TO MONITOR THEIR RADIATION
EXPOSURE.

WARNING
RADIATION HAZARD! FOLLOW THE GUIDELINES LISTED BELOW.

Observe the following protective measures when working on the scan unit with radiation ON:
Use a radiation shield.
Maintain a safe distance from the source.
Use the minimum dose and the smallest slice thickness.
Remove the phantom, if possible.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-19
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Precautions Against Thermal Hazards


Avoid touching components that can be hot e.g. (X-ray tube, Heat Exchanger).

WARNING
BE SURE TO ALLOW THESE COMPONENTS TO COOL TO A SAFE TEMPERATURE BEFORE PERFORMING ANY SERVICE OR
REPAIR PROCEDURE ON THEM.

Attaching Screws and Nuts

CAUTION
SCREW CONNECTIONS HAVE TO BE SECURED FOR SAFETY REASONS WITH A
TORQUE WRENCH AND THE TORQUE LISTED (NM).

THE TORQUES FOR SAFETY-RELEVANT SCREW CONNECTIONS ARE LISTED IN THE


ENCLOSED INSTRUCTIONS.

WHEN REPLACING SCREWS AND WASHERS ONLY IDENTICAL PARTS ARE


PERMISSIBLE.

Fasten all screws and nuts on the rotating part of the Gantry with the torque values specified in Figure 2-4 Screws Used on
Mx8000 IDT Units on page 1-22, except screws up to M3, slotted screws and Phillips head screws, which are tightened with
the wrench required and not with a torque wrench.
Tighten all screws and nuts with LOCTITE (See also, Using LOCTITE on page 1-23), except self-locking nuts, safety screws
and safety nuts.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-20
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

For more details, refer to the descriptions for replacement of parts.


Do not loosen or tighten safety screws and safety nuts (screws and nuts with grooves on the underside of the screw head) more
than five times.
Clean dirty grooves of safety screws or safety nuts with a wire brush.
Do not use a lock washer more than once. After loosening the screw or nut, change the washer.
Do not attempt to use torque wrenches to exceed the specified torque. When the specified torque is reached, there is a clearly
audible and perceptible sound and sign. Tightening the screw or nut beyond that point may destroy the screw or nut and the
torque wrench. If you suspect that a screw or nut was tightened too much, change the screw or nut.
If a torque wrench has been stressed beyond a specified value, the range of the torque wrench may be corrupted. In this case,
return the torque wrench to the manufacturer for repair or re-calibration.
When not in use, leave the torque wrench at the low setting. After prolonged non-use or storage, run the torque wrench
repeatedly with a low torque; this lubricates the moving parts and improves its accuracy.
Torque wrenches should be returned to the manufacturer for calibration and checking at regular intervals.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-21
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Tightening Torques for Screw Connections


Table 1-1 shows nominal tightening torques in Nm and wrench sizes in mm for screws and nuts with metric threads used on
Mx8000 IDT units.
Table 1-1:
Strength Class 8.8 Strength Class 100
HEXAGON HEXAGON SOCKET HEXAGON HEAD SAFETY HEXAGON SAFETY THREADED PIN
SOCKET HEAD COUNTERSUNK SCREW & NUT, SOCKET HEAD HEXAGON HEAD
SCREW SCREW HEXAGON NUT WITH SCREW SCREW & NUT
PLASTIC INSERT
1 IN Figure 2-4 2 IN Figure 2-4 3 IN Figure 2-4 4 IN Figure 2-4 5 IN Figure 2-4 6 IN Figure 2-4
Nominal tightening wrench tightening wrench tightening wrench tightening wrench tightening wrench tightening wrench
thread torque size mm torque size mm torque size mm torque size mm torque size mm torque size mm
diameter Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm
M3 1.3 2.5 1.3 2.0 1.3 5.5` - - - - 0.8 1.5
M4 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 3.0 7.0 - - - - 2.0 2.0
M5 6.0 4.0 6.0 3.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 4.0 9.0 8.0 3.7 2.5
M6 10.2 5.0 10.2 4.0 10.2 10.0 19.0 5.0 16.0 10.0 6.5 3.0
M8 25.3 6.0 25.3 5.0 25.3 13.0 39.0 6.0 35.0 13.0 16.0 4.0
M10 49.8 8.0 49.8 6.0 49.8 17.0 80.0 8.0 75.0 15.0 30.0 5.0
M12 87.6 10.0 87.6 8.0 87.6 19.0 120.0 10.0 115.0 17.0 - -

Figure 2-4: Screws Used on Mx8000 IDT Units

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-22
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Using LOCTITE

CAUTION
SCREW CONNECTIONS HAVE TO BE SECURED FOR SAFETY REASONS WITH A
TORQUE WRENCH AND THE TORQUE LISTED (NM).

THE TORQUES FOR SAFETY-RELEVANT SCREW CONNECTIONS ARE LISTED IN THE


ENCLOSED INSTRUCTIONS.

WHEN REPLACING SCREWS AND WASHERS ONLY IDENTICAL PARTS ARE


PERMISSIBLE.

All screws and nuts on the rotating part of the Gantry must be secured with LOCTITE, except safety screws and safety nuts,
which are secured in place without LOCTITE.
The following two tightness classes are used:
LOCTITE No.222, lightly tightened and easily loosened is for all screws up to type M3, as well as all slotted screws and
Phillips head screws.
LOCTITE No. 242, moderately tightened, can still be loosened is for all screws not listed under LOCTITE No. 222.

All parts that come into contact with LOCTITE must be clean and free of grease.
Apply a few drops of LOCTITE to the screw or to the first few threads of nut threading before inserting and turning the screw or
nut in place, so that LOCTITE fills the threading when the screw or nut is completely secured. Apply LOCTITE sparingly.
Since LOCTITE remains fluid on contact with air over a long time, any excess can easily be wiped away later.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-23
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

NOTE:

On contact with air, LOCTITE hardens slowly. On contact with metals, it hardens only through
catalyzation. Salt crystals form, which cause no damage and are non-corrosive.

Protective Measures

LOCTITE is non-toxic. However, prolonged contact with the skin can cause irritations to the skin. Wounds should be protected,
since the healing process is slowed by contact with LOCTITE.
If LOCTITE splashes into the eye, rinse immediately with tap water or boric acid solution. Where contact with the skin cannot
be avoided, we recommend the use of paper tissues to wipe away the LOCTITE.
After applying LOCTITE, wash hands with soap and water. Do not use a cleaning agent to clean your hands.

Storage

LOCTITE can be stored for at least once a year at room temperature. Close the bottle when not in use.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-24
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

System Specific Safety Precautions

Working with System Components


Protection of Electrostatically Sensitive Devices

The used integrated circuits and PC boards, which are equipped with electronic modules require special careful handling
because of their electrostatic sensitive structures and their extremely high input impedances.
Use the indicated means of protection. Refer to the section on ESD Anti-static Kit protection in this chapter.

Gantry

Before beginning any operations on the Gantry, do the following:


1. Wait until rotation has completely stopped.
2. Disable Gantry rotation. For this purpose, set switch S301 in the inner left side of the Gantry to
position 0 (Figure 2-5).

WARNING Figure 2-5: S301 in


ELECTRICAL HAZARD! TURN THE POWER OFF FROM THE MAIN HOSPITAL BREAKER. OFF position

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-25
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

3. Connect the rotating and the stationary parts of the


Gantry with a ground cable (supplied with the
system). When you are finished working, remove the
ground cable (see Figure 2-6).

Hazardous voltage levels (560 VDC) can be present, even if the


system is switched OFF. Take the following precautionary
measures regarding hazardous electrical voltages:
Ground
Keep the back of the Gantry closed.
Cable
Do not touch the power slip rings or the carbon brush
holders on the back of the Gantry.

Figure 2-6: Ground Cable Connection

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-26
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Safety Precautions Before Opening the Gantry Back Cover

WARNING
THE SYSTEM HAS TO BE SWITCHED OFF COMPLETELY USING THE ON-SITE ON/OFF SWITCH BEFORE ANY WORK IS DONE
IN THE GANTRY.
REMOVE FUSES F100, F200 IN THE PDC.
MAKE SURE THAT THE SYSTEM IS SECURED AGAINST ACCIDENTAL SWITCH ON!

2-2

Figure 2-7: PDC Fuses F100, F200

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-27
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Before working on the following part, wait until the capacitor bank is discharged (at least five minutes)! Check that the two yellow
LEDs on D450 inside the PDC unit are OFF.
DCC Power D450
Slip Rings
Carbon Brushes
Generator Electronics
PSS Gantry (Measure the voltage level at X303.)

WARNING
TO ENSURE THAT THE CAPACITOR BANK IS DISCHARGED, YOU CAN MEASURE THE UDC VOLTAGE ON THE FOLLOWING
POINTS:
UDC_POS AND UDC_NEG ON D450 INSIDE THE PDC UNIT
UDC_POS AND UDC_NEG ON RIGHT GANTRY STAND
UDC_POS AND UDC_NEG ON SLIP RING GANTRY REAR SIDE
UDC_POS AND UDC_NEG ON GENERATOR ELECTRONIC BOX

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-28
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Generator Cabinet

CAUTION
REPLACE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS IF COMPONENTS SOLDERED ONTO THE BOARD,
INCLUDING FUSES, ARE DEFECTIVE.

WARNING
ONLY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL MAY HAVE ACCESS TO THE INSIDE OF THE PDC CABINET FOR ANY REASON
(TO THE F1 SWITCH OR TO THE UPS).

Operating Station

WARNING
ROLLOVER HAZARD! TAKE CAUTION WHEN SLIDING OUT HOST COMPUTER OR CIRS SERVERS FROM THE COMPUTER
RACK.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-29
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Optical Disk
To ensure the reliability of the safety configuration integrated into the drive, the system may be installed or maintained only by
qualified service and maintenance personnel.

The use of parts is limited to original spare


parts.
Work with respect to the optical disk may
be performed only in compliance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
Observe the warning labels.
Warning labels may not be removed at any
time (see Figure 2-8).
Figure 2-8: Laser Warning Label

Light Markers

WARNING
LASER RADIATION HAZARD- DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.

Specification for Laser Type FP - 67/ 1LF (LASER COMPONENTS GmbH):


Output power <1mW
Wave length 670 nm
Classification according to DHHS regulations 21 CFR Chap. J / DIN
VDE 0837: Class 2 Laser Product

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-30
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) Anti-static Kit


The components are delivered in pink plastic film. The film protects against dust and prevents electrostatic discharge. Some
system components contain electrostatically-sensitive parts.

CAUTION
KEEP THE COMPONENTS WRAPPED IN THE PINK PLASTIC FILM UNTIL THEY ARE
REQUIRED.
ALWAYS USE ESD ANTI-STATIC WRISTBANDS WHEN TOUCHING ELECTRICAL
COMPONENTS OR DEVICES.

ESDAnti-Static Kit
This section describes the use of the ESDAnti-Static Kit with the Mx8000 IDT systems.

Purpose
This ESD Anti-static Kit is designed to connect a field service engineer and the static-dissipative work mat to the same ground
point. The wrist strap and the dissipative mat will drain any static charges from the body and from any conductive objects placed
on the mat, and will prevent the generation of any new static charges.

Tools
Standard FSE tool kit

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-31
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Parts
ESDAnti-Static Kit (see Figure 2-9)
Static-dissipative work mat, with
pockets for storing kit components Work Mat
Ground cord assembly
Coiled cord Wrist
Black cord Strap
Black snap
Banana Plug
Alligator clip
Adjustable wrist strap
Coiled Cord
Alligator
Clip
Banana
Plug
Black
Cord
Black Snap

Figure 2-9: ESD Anti-static Kit Parts

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-32
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Procedure

WARNING
ELECTRICAL HAZARD! BEFORE WORKING ON ELECTRICAL PARTS IN THE GANTRY ROTOR, ENSURE THAT THE GROUND
CABLE IS CONNECTED TO THE STATOR AND ROTOR. TO PREVENT AN ELECTRIC SHOCK, FOLLOW THE PROCEDURE
BELOW.

Connecting the Ground Cable to the Rotor and Stator

The rotor bearing is made from non-conductive material. Therefore, it is required to connect the rotor to a good ground prior to
performing any service procedure on the rotor.
1. Move the couch out and down from the Gantry panel.
2. Turn the gantry power OFF, and turn the F1 switch in the PDC OFF.
3. Open the front cover, and turn the S301 to the zero position.
4. Rotate the rotor by hand until the DMS is at 12 oclock, and lock the rotor with the locking pin.
5. Connect the ground cable to the rotor ground point and to the stator ground point (see Figure 2-10).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-33
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Rotor
Ground
Point

Ground
Cable

Stator
Ground
Point

Figure 2-10: Ground Cable Connections

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-34
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Ground Cable Connection

NOTE:

The stator contains two ground points (see Figure 2-11). Use one for the ground cable
connection to the rotor, and the other to connect the ESD Anti-static Kit.

Stator
Ground
Point
Stator
Ground
Point

Figure 2-11: Stator Ground Points

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-35
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

Connecting the ESD Anti-static Kit


1. Unfold the work mat on the couch and remove the kit contents from the mat pockets.
2. Snap the ground cord assembly to the work mat by means of the large black snap (see Figure 2-12).

Black Snap

Black Cord

Work Mat

Wrist Strap

Coiled Cord

Figure 2-12: ESD Anti-static Kit Components

3. Slip on the elastic wrist strap. Adjust so that the wrist strap fits snugly, yet comfortably.
4. Connect the coiled cord of the ground cord assembly to the wrist strap by means of the small plastic snap.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-36
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

5. Connect the ESD Anti-static Kit to one of these units as follows:


Stator (when working on the DMS in the Rotor see Step 6)
Patient Table
Rack

a. Connect the black cord of the ground cord assembly to the stator ground point by the banana plug (see Figure 2-13).

Stator
Ground
Point

ESD
Black
Cord

Figure 2-13: ESD Anti-static Kit Connection to the Stator

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-37
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

b. Connect the black cord of the ground cord assembly to a metal surface of the couch by the alligator clip
(see Figure 2-14).

Alligator
Clip

Figure 2-14: ESD Anti-static Kit Connection to the Couch

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-38
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

c. Connect the black cord of the ground cord assembly to a metal surface of the rack by the alligator clip (see Figure
2-15).

Alligator
Clip

Figure 2-15: ESD Anti-static Kit Connection to the Rack

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-39
Mx8000 IDT General
Service Manual Safety Guidelines

6. When working on the DMS in the Rotor, connect the ESD Anti-static Kit to the Stator.
The field service engineer is now static-protected, and can safely handle static-sensitive boards and components. Place each
part only on the grounded mat.
Transport replacement PC boards in static-shielding bags or containers. Place any faulty boards removed from the equipment
in static-shielding packaging so that additional damage is not done during shipment to the repair depot.

CAUTION
THE GROUNDING PROCEDURES DETAILED ABOVE EFFECTIVELY REMOVE STATIC
FROM CONDUCTIVE OBJECTS LIKE THE HUMAN BODY OR METAL PARTS. HOWEVER,
NONCONDUCTIVE OBJECTS (SUCH AS SYNTHETIC CLOTHING, PLASTIC COFFEE
CUPS, CIGARETTE PACKS, VINYL WORK ORDER ENVELOPES, OR COMMON
PLASTICS) CAN ALSO CARRY LARGE AMOUNTS OF STATIC CHARGE, AND THE
CHARGES ON NONCONDUCTORS SUCH AS THESE CANNOT BE REMOVED BY
GROUNDING. THEREFORE, THE ENGINEER MUST TAKE CARE TO KEEP ALL SUCH
NONCONDUCTORS AS FAR FROM THE WORK AREA AND THE SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT
AS POSSIBLE.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

2-40
Covers Replacement

Covers Replacement

Overview
This chapter describes procedures for covers replacement of the Mx8000 IDT system and includes the following covers
replacement procedures:
Patient Table Lower Covers and Bellows Replacement
Patient Table Upper Side Covers Replacement
Gantry Top Cover Replacement
Gantry Bottom Cover Replacement
Gantry Front Cover Replacement
Gantry Rear Cover Replacement

Login/Logout Procedures
Logout and Shutdown Procedure
When performing parts replacement, log OFF from the Host and IRS computers and shutdown the power as follows:

Host Computer

1. Open the Archive Manager.


2. Click File | Logout.
3. From the Logout window, click Shut Down, select Shut Down and click OK.
4. Press Ctrl twice to switch to the IRS computer.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-1
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

IRS Computer

1. Close Master.exe.
2. Select Start | Shut Down and click OK.

Turn OFF Power

1. Turn OFF the ON/OFF switch on the Computer Rack door.


2. Turn OFF the output power from the UPS by pressing on OFF pushbutton.
3. Turn OFF the on-site power switch.

WARNING
BEFORE YOU BEGIN ANY OF THE PROCEDURES IN THIS SECTION, FOLLOW THE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SAFETY
CHAPTER OF THE SERVICE MANUAL.

Login and Startup Procedure


Perform this procedure when restarting the system after replacing any part.
1. Turn ON the on-site power switch.
2. Turn ON the UPS using the ON push button.
3. Turn ON the STBY/ON switch on the Scan Control Box.
4. Turn ON the IRS from the ON/OFF switch and wait until the Master.exe starts up.
5. Press <Ctrl> twice to switch to the Host computer.
6. Turn ON the Host.
7. Log in as mxservice (password service_only).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-2
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Patient Table Covers Replacement


Read these instructions completely prior to beginning the replacement of the Table Covers. Follow all procedures for removing
and installing the table covers.
Follow Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) protection guidelines as required.
Use the tools and auxiliary materials recommended in this chapter.
Prior to disconnecting the electrical cables, sketch a diagram of the connections or mark the cables for later identification.

Safety Notes

Follow all general safety guidelines as described in Safety Guidelines.


Note the special safety guidelines indicated in the instructions in this chapter.
Tighten the screws and nuts using the torque indicated in these instructions and secure them with Loctite when required.
Secure cables with cable ties and/or cable clamps as indicated and ensure that they are connected according to the original
configuration.

CAUTION
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS MUST BE REPLACED IF COMPONENTS SOLDERED ONTO
THE BOARD (INCLUDING FUSES) ARE DEFECTIVE.

Required Tools and Auxiliary Materials

Standard FSE toolkit.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-3
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Patient Table Lower Covers and Bellows Replacement

Remove the covers as follows:


3-1

1. Bring the Patient Table to a height of 800 mm.


1. Remove the lower cover (Figure 3-2), located
directly behind the bellows.
2. Remove the side covers:
a. Remove the M4 Decorative Screws on each
side of the Patient Table (Figure 3-3).
b. Pull the side cover out and then down
releasing the four upper pins (Figure 3-4).

Figure 3-1: Table Covers

3-2 3-3 3-4

Figure 3-2: Lower Cover Figure 3-3: Side Cover decorative screws Figure 3-4: Removing Side Cover

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-4
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

3. Remove the inside cover by removing the four M4 Decorative Screws (1 in Figure 3-5).
4. Loosen both screws (2 in Figure 3-5) and push the support toward the front.
5. Remove the three upper lateral covers (Figure 3-6)
6. Remove the screws from the upper guide rails (Figure 3-7). Raise the table if necessary.
7. Remove the bellows.

3-5 3-6 3-7

1 1
2

Figure 3-5: Inside Cover Screws Figure 3-6: Three Upper Lateral Covers Figure 3-7: Removing Screws from Upper
Guide Rails

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-5
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Bellows/Vertical Electronics (D702)


Move the table to a comfortable work position between 800 and 1,000 mm (317 to 117 at the Gantry panels) using the
corresponding keys on the Gantry operating panel or the service key on the table.
If movement of the table is not possible due to a table malfunction, use the manual table height adjustment nut on the motor
block. If it is not possible to move the table via the manual table height adjustment nut, cut the bellows into two pieces with an
appropriate tool and remove them.

NOTE:

When replacing parts in the Patient Table, remove the bellows from the upper guide rails.
When using the manual table height adjustment nut, do not raise the table higher than 1,000
mm (117 at the Gantry panels).

3-8

Tabletop/Horizontal Electronics (D701)


Move the table to a comfortable work position between 800 and 1,000 mm (317 to 117 at the Gantry panels) using the
corresponding keys on the Gantry operating panel or the service key on the table.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-6
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Securing the Bellows to the Patient Table Frame

Examine the accessories for securing the bellows (see


3-9

Table 3-1 and Figure 3-8).


Long Metal
Strips
Table 3-1: Accessories for Securing the Bellows

ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY

1 Hex screws 10 Short Metal


Strips
2 Long metal strip 2
3 Short metal strip 2

Hex Screws

Figure 3-8: Accessories for Securing the Bellows


2-10

2-11

Tools
Standard FSE tool kit
Plastic hammer

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-7
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Preparation

1. Raise the Patient Table to a height of 100 cm


3-12

(40") approx. (117 on the Gantry panel).


2. Locate the holes on the bottom of the aluminium
guide rails. The holes are not readily
visible. Slide a finger along the underside of the
rail to locate them (see Figure 3-9 and Figure
3-10).
Guide Rail
3. Insert a hex screw into the hole, and tighten Screws
slightly by hand. Ensure that the screw can be
inserted completely.
4. Loosen the hex screw so that it does not
protrude above the bottom body of the guide
rail (see Figure 3-10).
Guide Rail
5. Repeat steps 3-4 for the nine remaining hex Hole (approx.
screws in all four guide rails. location)

Figure 3-9: Aluminum Guide Rails

NOTE:

If a hex screw cannot be completely inserted, loosen some corresponding


screws securing the guide rail to the Patient Table frame (see Figure 3-9).

Pull the guide rail out as far as possible, and tighten the guide rail screws.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-8
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Main Procedure
1. Insert the bellows into the four guide rails around the Patient Table frame (see Figure 3-10).

Figure 3-10: Attaching Bellows to Patient Table Frame

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-9
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

NOTE:

Ensure that the bellows are fully inserted into the guide rails all around the
Patient Table.

If not fully inserted, you will not be able to perform the next step.

2. Position one of the four metal strips (see Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12) along the appropriate long or short guide rail, so
that the metal strip holes are opposite the previously inserted hex screws.

2-13 2-14

Figure 3-11: Long Metal Strip Figure 3-12: Short Metal Strip

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-10
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

3. Slightly tilt the metal strip with the outer edge down, and gently insert one end of the strip into the guide rail slot below the
bellows. (Move the outer edge of the strip up and down to facilitate entry) (see Figure 3-13).
2-15

Metal Strip
Slightly
Tilted

Figure 3-13: Tilt the Metal Strip

4. Use the plastic hammer to gently insert the end of the metal strip into the guide rail slot.
5. Tighten the corresponding hex screw to secure the end of the metal strip in place.
6. Use the plastic hammer to gently insert the remaining metal strip into the guide rail slot, and tighten the remaining hex
screws.
7. Repeat steps 2-6 for the three remaining metal strips.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-11
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Installing the Patient Table Lower Covers


1. Install the covers, proceeding in the reverse order of the previous removal procedure (Section Patient Table Lower Covers
and Bellows Replacement).
2. Connect the protective conductors as needed (ground).

Tests and Adjustments

1. Ensure that the covers are attached and seated correctly.


2. Test all possible table movements.

Final Steps

1. Perform the PTH adjustment Tabletop/Horizontal Electronics (D701).


2. Perform a few scans to check the system performance.

Patient Table Upper Side Covers Replacement


Read these instructions completely prior to beginning the replacement.
Follow all procedures for removing and installing the PT Horizontal Board.
Follow Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) protection guidelines as required.
Use the tools and auxiliary materials recommended in this chapter.
Prior to disconnecting the electrical cables, sketch a diagram of the connections or mark the cables for later identification.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-12
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Safety Notes

Follow all general safety guidelines as described in Safety Guidelines.


Note the special safety guidelines indicated in the instructions in this chapter.
Tighten the screws and nuts using the torque specifically indicated in these instructions. Secure them with the specified
Loctite if required.
Secure cables with cable ties and/or cable clamps as indicated and ensure that they are connected according to the original
configuration.

Required Tools and Auxiliary Materials

Service tool set


Feeler gauge
Small mirror
Screwdriver M4 with round-head
Magnetic screwdriver
Torque wrench 1 - 12 Nm (item number 34 30 063)
2.5 Allen wrench
Loctite 242/221

Removing Upper Side Table Covers


1. Move the table to a comfortable work position between 800 and 1,000 (317 to 117 at the Gantry panels) using the
corresponding keys on the Gantry operating panel or the service key on the table.
2. Power OFF the system by turning Switch F1 in the PDC OFF.
3. Slide the tabletop forward to the end stop (in the Gantry).
4. Remove both rear covers as indicated by item 1 in Figure 3-14 and items 1 and 2 in Figure 3-15.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-13
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

3-16 3-17 3-18

1
1
2

Figure 3-14: Table Coversside view Figure 3-15: Table Coversrear view Figure 3-16: Lower Covers

5. Slide the Top Support backward to the end stop.


6. Remove the lower cover (l in Figure 3-16) that is located directly behind the bellows.
.) and push the support toward the back.

3-19 3-20 3-21

1
Figure 3-17: Inner Cover Figure 3-18: Caps and Screws Figure 3-19: Screw Caps

7. Loosen both screws (1 in Figure 3-19) and push the support towards the back.
8. Remove the four front caps (1 in Figure 3-18) and the screws (2 in Figure 3-18) first, then remove the eight rear caps (1
in Figure 3-19) and the screws (1 in Figure 3-19) from the tabletop (tabletop toward the back).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-14
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

9. Later during the installation, apply Loctite 242 to the screws and tighten them using a force of 6 Nm - 1 Nm.

NOTE:

The caps may be sealed with adhesive. Some force will be required to remove them. Secure
the new caps with adhesive.

10. Remove the tabletop.


11. Measure the gap between the table carriage and the side cover to be replaced using a feeler gauge (l in Figure
3-20). Record the value.
12. Remove the side covers and switch rails.
3-22 3-23

Figure 3-20: Table Carriage Gap Measurement Figure 3-21: Front View

13. Remove the screws (1 in Figure 3-22) and remove the bracket.
14. Loosen the screw.
15. Loosen the rear screw on the side cover.
16. Remove the front plates (l in Figure 3-22) from both sides.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-15
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

3-24 3-25 3-26

Figure 3-22: Front Plates Figure 3-23: Upper Front Cover Figure 3-24: Upper Front Cover being removed

17. Remove the upper front cover (1 in Figure 3-23 and Figure 3-24).
18. Loosen the protective conductor and the screws along the entire length of the cover and remove the cover, pulling from
the front (Figure 3-24).

NOTE:

Ensure that the cover and the corresponding extensions (I in Figure 3-24 and Figure 3-25) are
secured with the types and amounts of screws indicated below during reinstallation.

NOTE:

Record which screws were used at which locations.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-16
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Table 3-2: Types of screws:

AMOUNT SCREW TYPE

11 M4 x 8 (hex-head screws)
M4 x l0 (Allen screws) + 10 x
10
M4 (nuts)
26 Long cover screws
M4 x 8 Allen screw for
1
protective conductor

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-17
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

19. Remove the seven long screws (1 in Figure 3-26) on the inside, and seven short screws (1 in Figure 3-27) on the outside
from the upper side cover.
3-27 3-28

Figure 3-25: Screw Positions Figure 3-26: Long Screw Position


3-29 3-30

1 3 2

Figure 3-27: Short Screw Positions Figure 3-28: Four Screws and Cam (#3)

20. Remove the Side cover.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-18
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Installing the Upper Side Table Covers


Install the table parts by working in the reverse order in which they were removed. Ensure compliance with the following note.

NOTE:

Connect all protective conductors that were disconnected earlier.

Set the distance between the table carriage and cover (l in Figure 3-20) as recorded earlier using a feeler gauge when installing
the new side cover.

NOTE:

Ensure that the front support rollers can turn.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-19
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

If there are problems:


Loosen the three attachment screws (1 in Figure 3-28) and move the rollers accordingly.
If this does not solve the problem, the cam must be adjusted:
a. Loosen the screw (2 in Figure 3-28).
b. Turn the cam of the support roller using a crescent wrench at location (3 in Figure 3-28). Set the minimum gap 0.05
+ 0.1 mm between the tabletop and support roller for the entire travel range of the tabletop.

NOTE:

Re-tighten the screws previously loosened as described in the instructions.

Tighten the long/short screws of the side cover (1 in Figure 3-26 and Figure 3-27), primarily the four inner screws that are not
easily accessed from below as shown in figures (1 in Figure 3-28 and Figure 3-29).
3-31 3-32

Figure 3-29: Screw in Ratchet Figure 3-30: Positioning Screw


Attachment

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-20
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Place each screw on a corresponding attachment for the small ratchet (1 in Figure 3-29). Apply Loctite 221 and carefully turn
it into the threads.
Use a small mirror to assist in seeing the position of the threaded holes (1 in Figure 3-30).
Tighten the screws using a torque of 1.7 0.2 Nm with a torque wrench, wherever space permits.
Use a special screw driver with rounded head (l in Figure 3-31) to tighten the lower inner attachment screws of the side cover.
Place the screw to be used directly on the tool and then use the tool to insert and tighten it (1 in Figure 3-32).
3-33 3-34

Figure 3-31: Round Head Figure 3-32: Screw on Screwdriver


Screwdriver

Final Step

Perform a Quality Constancy Test to check the system performance.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-21
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Gantry Top Cover Replacement


Gantry Top Cover Removal
1. Remove both top covers of the left and right legs.
2. Release four screws of the Gantry Top Cover (see Figure 3-33 and Figure 3-34).
3. Remove the Gantry top cover.

Figure 3-33: Gantry Left Leg Figure 3-34: Gantry Right Leg

Gantry Top Cover Installation


1. Replace the Gantry top cover to its original position.
2. Tighten the four screws that hold the cover (see Figure 3-33 and Figure 3-34).
3. Replace the top covers of the Gantry legs.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-22
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Gantry Bottom Cover Replacement


Gantry Bottom Cover Removal
1. Open the Gantry front cover.
2. Remove the three nuts on each side of the bottom cover (see Figure 3-36).

Screw
Housing

Three Nuts

Figure 3-35: Bottom Cover Figure 3-36: Top View of Bottom Cover

CAUTION
The Bottom cover is accurately aligned. Do Not Remove the Screw
Housing. Remove the three Nuts only to maintain Cover alignment.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-23
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Gantry Bottom Cover Installation


1. Position the bottom cover with the screws.
2. Tighten the three nuts on each side with a torque of 8 Ncm.
3. Close the Gantry front cover.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-24
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Gantry Front Cover Replacement


This document describes the procedure for replacing a defective or damaged Gantry Front Cover.

Safety Precautions
Before beginning any operations on the Gantry, do the following:
1. Wait until rotation has completely stopped.
2. Disable Gantry rotation by setting switch S301 in the Gantry (left, below) to position 0.

WARNING
TURN THE POWER OFF FROM THE MAIN HOSPITAL CIRCUIT BREAKER.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-25
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

3. Connect the rotating and the stationary parts of the Gantry with a
ground cable (supplied with the system). When you are finished
working, remove the ground cable Figure 3-37.
Hazardous voltage levels (560 VDC) can be present, even if the system is
switched OFF. Take the following precautionary measures regarding
hazardous electrical voltages:
Keep the back of the Gantry closed.
Do not touch the power slip rings or the carbon brush holders on the back of Ground
the Gantry. Cable

Gantry Front Cover Removal


1. Unscrew the two screws at the bottom of the front cover and open
the cover.
2. Disconnect the connectors from the Gantry front cover (Figure Figure 3-37: Ground Cable Connection
3-38).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-26
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

3. Disconnect the white wire from the upper laser light marker (Figure 3-39).

Figure 3-38: Front Gantry Cover Connectors Figure 3-39: Front Gantry Ground Cable

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-27
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

4. Hold the Gantry front cover on both sides and release the ten screws that
secure the front cover hinge (Figure 3-40).
5. Remove the cover with caution.

Gantry Front Cover Installation


1. Position the cover.
2. Tighten four screws to a torque of 8 Nm, as shown in Figure 3-41 and
Figure 3-42.

Figure 3-40: Remove Screws

Figure 3-41: Screws securing left side


Figure 3-42: Screws securing right side

3. After tightening the four screws, close the Front Cover and align it as described below:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-28
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

4. After closing the Gantry Front Cover, check the gap between the edge of the
front cover and the back cone as shown in Figure 3-43
Gap should be checked (Figure 3-43) for uniformity at 900 increments, that is
four times around the ring. If measured gaps are not equal, adjust the front
cover, as below:
Alignment can be performed in three directions:
Up - Down.
In - Out.
Left - Right.
For all of the above alignments, perform the following:
Loosen the nuts securing the Front Cover, without removing the nuts. Figure 3-43: Measuring the gap

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-29
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Move the Cover slightly to the required position, whether Up - Down, In - Out or Left - Right. (Figure 3-44 and Figure 3-45).

Up-Down Up-Down

Left- Right In-Out


In-Out
Left- Right

Figure 3-44: Left side adjusting screws Figure 3-45: Right side adjusting screws

5. Connect the white wire from the upper laser light marker. (Figure 3-46)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-30
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

6. Reconnect the connectors that were removed in (see Step 2 on page 26) in Cover Removal (Figure 3-47).

Figure 3-46: Grounding Cable Figure 3-47: Front Gantry Cover Connectors

NOTE:

There is no need to connect the microphone wire with systems Mx8000 Dual / Quad.

7. Close the front cover.

Lower Cover Adjustments:


1. Loosen the bolts supporting the lower section of the Front Cover on both the left and right sides.
2. Align the lower cover with the front cover.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-31
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

3. Tighten the bolts.

Supporting bolts To adjust, loosen bolts on left and on right

Figure 3-48: Lower Cover Figure 3-50: Nuts supporting


Figure 3-49: Bolts supporting Lower
Front Cover - Left Side Lower Front Cover - Right Side

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-32
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Labels:
Place the labels as follow:

Table 2-3: Label Locations

Location 1 Location 2
Mx8000 Dual Philips Logo Mx8000 Logo
Mx8000 Quad New Philips Logo Mx8000 Logo
Mx8000 IDT New Philips Logo Mx8000IDT Logo

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-33
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Location 1 Location 2

Figure 3-51: Philips Logo in Location 1 Figure 3-52: Model Label in Location 2

Interlocks Check
1 Run Axial Scan.
2 When the system is ready, remove the right front panel screw.
3 The Interlock mechanism should be activated and the system should reduce speed and stop.
In case the interlock is not activated, it should be adjusted.
4 Run the above procedure for the left screw.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-34
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Interlock Adjustment

NOTE:

Before adjusting the front interlock, make sure the Gantry is switched OFF. Remove the wires
from the interlock.

The front cover interlock (Figure 3-53) can be adjusted as follow:


To adjust the X-Y plane (UP Down, Left Right), loosen the rear nut.
To adjust the Z- Direction (In-Out), loosen the front nut (Figure 3-53) and
rotate the interlock.

Rear nut
Final Steps - Interlock Adjustment behind plate

Make sure that all nuts are secured.


Make sure the interlock wires are re-connected.

Z-Direction
nut

Figure 3-53: Front cover Interlock mechanism

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-35
Laser Marker Adjustment
Tests and Adjustments

1. Close the Gantry front cover.


2. Turn the Gantry ON. Turn the light marker ON from the Gantry
panel.
3. Position the system phantom in the middle of the scan circle
(Patient Table height approximately 125mm) so that the light falls
on one of the notches on the phantom (Figure 3-54). Light
Marker
Verify a continuous line on the system phantom. If the line is duplicate,
adjust the light marker as follows:
1. Cover one of the light markers to find out which one needs
calibration.
2. Open the Gantry front cover and adjust as follows (Figure 3-55):
a. If line A is duplicate, adjust it with screws A and B (Figure 3-56).
Figure 3-54: Light Markers on System Phantom
b. If line B is duplicate, adjust it with screw C (Figure 3-55).
. Final StepsTurn the service switch S-301 to 1.Close the Gantry door and carefully insert the mylar gasket.

Screw C
Line A

Screw A

Screw B
Line B

Figure 3-55: System Phantom Figure 3-56: Light Marker Adjustment Screws

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-36
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Final Steps
1 Turn the service switch S-301 to 1.
2 Close the Gantry door and carefully insert the mylar gasket.
3 Turn the light markers ON. Verify that the light markers line up on the system phantom.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-37
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Standard Procedures

Login and Startup Procedure


Perform this procedure when restarting the system after replacing any Gantry parts.
1. Turn ON the on-site power switch.
2. Turn ON the UPS using the ON push button.
3. Turn ON the STBY/ON switch on the Scan Control Box.
4. Turn ON the IRS from the ON/OFF switch and wait until the Master.exe starts up.
5. Press <Ctrl> twice to switch to the Host computer.
6. Turn ON the Host.
7. Log in as mxservice (password service_only).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-38
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Gantry Rear Cover Replacement


The Gantry Rear Cover is fastened to the Gantry at the following six points:
3-37

On the Gantry (Figure 3-57):


1. Top of the Gantry: there are two mounting brackets (see Detail A)
2. Middle of the Gantry: there are two threaded holes adjacent to the funnel (Detail B)
3. Bottom of the Gantry: there are two door catches (see Detail C)
3-36
3-35

DETAIL A
Detail A Mounting Brackets

Mounting Brackets

Threaded Holes
DETAIL B
Detail B Threaded Hole

Door Catches
DETAIL C

Figure 3-57: Detail C Door Catch

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-39
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

On the Gantry Rear Cover (Figure 3-58):


4. Top of the Gantry Rear Cover: there are two mounting hooks that latch on to the mounting brackets (see Detail A)
5. Middle of the Gantry Rear Cover: there are two screws that screw into threaded holes (see
Detail B)
6. Bottom of the Gantry Rear Cover: there are two strikes that are secured by the door catches
(see Detail C)

Mounting Hooks
Detail A Mounting Hook

Screws

Detail B Screw (view


from the front of the cover)

Strikes

Detail C Strike
Figure 3-58: Fastening Points on Gantry Rear Cover

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-40
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

WARNING
ALL SIX POINTS MUST BE ATTACHED PROPERLY.

Gantry Rear Cover Removal


1. Unscrew the two screws with a flat screwdriver (see Figure 3-60).
2. Pull the bottom of the cover out gently on the sides to release the door catches (see Figure 3-59.
3. Lift the Rear Cover off the Gantry.

Figure 3-59: Opening the Door Catches


Figure 3-60: Opening the screws

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-41
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Gantry Rear Cover Installation


1. Position the Rear Cover so the hooks are in the mounting. brackets at
the top of the Gantry (see Figure 3-61).
2. Check that the Rear Cover is lined up properly.
Check that the edges are lined up properly and that the cracks are
closed on the upper corners (see Figure 3-62).
Check that the circular crack around the Gantry opening is closed
evenly all the way around (see Figure 3-63).

Figure 3-61: Hook in Mounting Bracket

Figure 3-62: Side Edges Figure 3-63: Circular Crack

3. Gently hit the bottom corners of the Rear Cover to engage the door catches (see Figure 3-64).
4. Close the screws with a flat screwdriver (see Figure 3-65).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-42
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Figure 3-64: Closing the Door Catches Figure 3-65: Closing the Screws

Figure 3-66 shows the Gantry with the rear cover installed. Proceed to Testing before resuming normal operation.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-43
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Figure 3-66: Gantry Rear Cover Mounted

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-44
Mx8000 IDT Parts Replacement
Service Manual Covers Replacement

Testing
1. Turn the system ON.
2. Bring the Gantry to a tilt of -30.
3. Check that the edges along the side of the Gantry stay closed while the Gantry is tilted.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

3-45
System Overview Block Diagram

System Overview Block Diagram

S ta tion ary G an tr y C ou ch PDC WC S

CTBox

DELL
650
R o t atin g Gant ry

I RS Front I ntel 2 IRS


R ea r

ACQ

BP

Figure 4-1: Mx8000 IDT System Overview Block Diagram


Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

4-1
Mx8000 IDT System Overview
Service Manual System Overview Block Diagram

Slip
X-Ray Electronics Box Rotating Gantry Stationary Gantry
Rings
560 VDC Filament Anode
Supply KV HV XFMR
Inverters Inverter (Rotor)
Drive Slot Ring Rotation
Scan Drive CAN
(1160 slots + Index) Frequency Control
PDC X-Ray Temperature & (Rotor) Motor Converter Module

Tube Pressure Sensors Gantry


D400 3 phase Rotation
Main Control
x x Focal Spot Deflection Coil
Encoder Slip Tilt CAN
Read Rings Frequency Control RTC
Phi_Z_Monitor Converter Module
Air Cal Compensator Head
Motor Gantry
Z_PSD Phi_PSD
Tilt Tilt Sensor Tilt
Wedge
A-Plane Collimator
Motor
A-Plane Front Vane Motor
MCU
A-Plane Rear GPC Control Panels
Ref Det
Amp (RDA) Reference Vane Motor
Detector
Stationary GPC
Rotating Rotating Laser Markers
Laser Markers Laser Markers
FOC scan field FOC
GPC Control Panel

Couch (Patient Handling System)


UHR Top Top Top Top PTH
Collimator P-Plane Collimator Pot Encoder Motor Brake
Motor
Mains1
Mains2
(230 VAC) UHR Collimator Table
from PDC Top Top Top Top Horizontal
672 x 24D in 42 ADM's Support Support Support Support
48VDC 1
Pot Encoder Motor Brake
42
from E606 ADMC's
Ribbon cables

DPU DMBL (1-21) DMBR (22-42) Vertical


ADU
CBox Power (ACU)
Temp Sensor & Thermal Switch Temp Sensor
Spindle PTV Switches
Supply Vertical Brake
Height Motor &
optical link Potentiometer Brake
RCOM Vertical Table
Frequency Vertical
ADU
(DOM) Converter
Transmitter
Capacitive Slip
Ring
scan data Receiver
to Acquisitor

Figure 4-2:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

4-2
Operating Station

Operating Station Overview

About the Operating Station


The Operating Station (OS), is used to operate and monitor scans.

The OS enables the operator to plan and execute the patient examination procedure by activating the scanning part of the
system. The OS acquires and stores raw data, performs real-time post-processing, and enables image reconstruction, viewing,
filming and storage.

The OS includes the Operator Console and the Computer Rack.


5-1

Figure 5-1: Operator Console and Computer Rack


Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-1
Operator Console

The Operator Console consists of the following:


21" Color monitor
Keyboard
Mouse
CT Box (Scan Control Box)
EOD

The color monitor, keyboard, and mouse are used with both the Host computer and the IRS. To switch between the Host and
the IRS, press twice on the <Ctrl> key.
The operator enters commands at the console either with the keyboard or interactively with the mouse. The result is displayed
on the color monitor. The scanning process is initialized from the SCAN toolbox on screen and controlled from the CT Box (Scan
Control Box).
The Operator Console interfaces between the Computer Rack and the operator as follows:
Command input and dialog via the keyboard
Graphic input via a mouse
Audio intercommunication between the patient and the operator
Dialog and image display on the monitor

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-2
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

Monitor
The color monitor enables the following:
Operator dialog with the system
Display of medical images

Keyboard
PS/2 enhanced, quiet key keyboard is supplied with the system. The keyboard is localized to Scandinavian and Spanish and
English.

Mouse
Logitech, three button non-scrolling mouse.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-3
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

CT Box (Scan Control Box)


The scanner is provided with a CT-Box (Scan Control Box) that supports control of the following:
Start scan in manual or automatic mode
Pause scanning
Couch in/out, up/down and gantry tilt control buttons.
Enable automatic (computer controlled) couch and tilt motion
Display of couch position and gantry tilt
Console side intercom functions with volume control
Emergency stop button
Gantry/system ON/OFF key
Display product and X-ray device warning indication

Table 5-1 lists the parts of the CT Box.

Table 5-1: The Parts of the CT Box

TOOL FUNCTION

KEYS For scan activation and interruption


GANTRY CONTROL Panel Controls and displays Gantry tilt angle and table movements
X-RAY ON Indicator Indicates that the X rays are being generated
STOP Button Halts all Gantry and table motions and X ray generation in case of an emergency
GANTRY ON/OFF Button Switches ON and OFF Gantry power
INTERCOM
CALL Button
Includes three buttons which control communications with the patient
TALK Button
VOLUME Button

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-4
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

Table 5-2: Windowing ToolsNot Active

TOOL FUNCTION

BRAIN Key
P. F. Key
BONE Key
Keys activate pre-programmed windows that display the respective organs
LUNG Key
ABDOMEN Key
SPINE Key
ALT Button Activates the preset windows
ENHANCE Button Sharpens or smooths the images

The status of the functional keys and the readings of the window control encoders are transferred to the Host Computer via two
serial ports.
The Gantry Control Panel communicates with the GPC (Gantry Panel Control) Unit via an additional serial port.
The CT Box is connected to the SDB (Signal Distribution Board) by a single cable (see Figure 5-2 and Figure 5-3).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-5
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

5-3

Horizontal Vertical Tilt


Display Display Display

5-2 In Out Up Dn Fwd Bwd

Power
Keyswitch

Volume Call Talk


Mic

Stop
I VE
A CT
Stop LED T
Intercom Panel Board
NO
Manual Auto Pause Enable

X-Ray On
Figure 5-2: CT Box

Scan Operation Panel Board

To/From SDB

Figure 5-3: CT Box Block Diagram

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-6
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

Scan Control Box


The Scan Control Box is serially connected to the GPC via the
SDB panel.
The Scan Control Box consists of the following:
Control Panel Keys, with LEDs, that are activated by
pressing. Motion begins again by releasing the key
and pressing it again. The following are the keys:
Patient Table IN
Patient Table OUT
Patient Table UP
Patient Table DOWN
Tilt FORWARD
Tilt BACKWARD
Digital Display (described in Table 5-1)
12 VDC supplied from the GPC card in the Gantry and
the CIB card on the Host computer.

Figure 5-4: Block Diagram of the Control Panel


Functions

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-7
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

Intercom Panel Board


The Intercom Panel Board
includes several functions: Host
SDB
Intercom Function
STOP Key J20 SI_1 COM1

POWER Key switch 12V

Preset WINDOW Keys Controller STOP_0


SRL_1
12V SI_1
J3
J4 X1 CIB
STOP_0 STOP_I
SRL_2 SRL_0
Stop STOP_I
SRL_1

Encoder Board SRL_0

X1
Gantry
SRL_2

Figure 5-5: Layout of Intercom Panel Board

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-8
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

Intercom Function
The Mx8000 IDT offers an audio connection between the operator at the console and the patient in the Gantry (see Figure 5-6).
The audio communication is controlled in one of the following ways:
Manually, with the CT Box push buttons.
By software, via the host speech program.
Talk to Patient
As long as the TALK button is pressed, the audio direction is from the CT Box microphone to the Gantry loudspeaker. When it
is released, there is a continual monitoring line from Gantry microphones to the CT Box.

Auto Voice (Scan Protocol)


Messages are transferred from the host to the patient through LINE OUT-RIGHT to the Gantry speaker located in the Gantry
funnel.

Operator Instructions
Instructions to the operator are transferred from the host (to the operator) through LINE OUT-LEFT, to the CT Box speaker.

Volume
Volume controls the audio level of the speaker on the CT Box.

Call
Turning the CALL key activates a two-tone doorbell sound, heard in the Gantry, through SI_1 (coming from the Host computer).

Gantry Audio
The Gantry Audio is located in the funnel and in the rear of the Gantry. It includes the following:
D344 is a programmable board, located in the Gantry top right-hand corner (see Figure 5-7), that is controlled by serial
communication (future application) for reducing noise from the Gantry microphones and for controlling the output sound
and loudness.
D345 is located in the Gantry rear top left-hand corner (see Figure 5-8). It includes analog amplifiers that amplify the
microphone signal from the Gantry to the CT Box and that amplify the microphone the signal from the operating station
to the loudspeaker in the Gantry.
Two microphones and a loudspeaker located in the funnel (see Figure 5-9).
Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-9
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

5-4

Com1
Host
Audio Multi-Serial

J13
Microphone Voice
CT Box to To
Gantry Audio MIC_CT Box P30 Multi-Serial
NOISE_CANCEL
Talk SI_1
Call
CONT Figure 5-7: Noise Cancellation
J20 SI.1
Speaker OP_INST
Gantry to
CT Box Audio MIC_GANTRY
SDB
Intercom Panel Board X1

W50

X13

MCU-RTC X12

W368

X1
12V
D344
Noise Cancellation Box PSS Figure 5-8: D345 Board
W313
X3

W355

X6 X102 X101 Loudspeaker


W356 D345
GPC
MIC_ENA
X103
MIC_GAN
X104

W382 W381
Front Cover Rear Funnel
D C B A D C B A
W389 W388 W387 W386 W385 W384 W383

Indicator Mic1 Mic2 Indicator Mic1 Mic2


Microphones
Lamp Speaker Right Left Lamp Speaker Right Left
(Option)
Figure 5-9: Funnel
Figure 5-6: Intercom Function Block Diagram (Old Version)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-10
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

Com1 X102 X1 X4
Host
Audio

J13
Microphone Voice
Scan Control Box
To Gantry Audio MIC_CT Box P30

Talk SI_1
Call
CONT
J20 SI.1
Speaker OP_INST
Gantry to
CT Box Audio MIC_GANTRY
SDB
Intercom Panel Board X1

W50

X13

MCU-RTC X12

W368-2
X104 X103
X1 Figure 5-11:
12V
X4 PSS
W313-2
D346

NOISEFILT BOARD Loudspeaker


X6 X102
W356
GPC
MIC_ENA
X103 X104

W382-2 W381-2
Front Cover Rear Funnel Microphones
D C B A D C B A
W389 W388 W387 W386 W385 W384 W383

Indicator Mic1 Mic2 Indicator Mic1 Mic2


Lamp Speaker Right Left Lamp Speaker Right Left
(Option)

Figure 5-10: Intercom Function Block Diagram (New Version) Figure 5-12: Funnel

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-11
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

STOP Key

The Intercom Panel includes a momentary STOP button.


The STOP button has one NORMALLY-OPENED key and one NORMALLY-CLOSED key.

Stop LED
The LED illuminates as long as the system is in STOP state.

Stop Report Loop, STOP_0, STOP_I


STOP_0 and STOP_I signals open the Stop Report Loop.

Power
12 VDC are supplied to the Scan Control Box from the following:
1. Host Computer CIB board via J4 for the function keys (Manual, Auto, Enable, Pause) and for the audio amplifier (mic and
speaker)
2. Gantry, GPC board via P5 on SDB for the Digital Display, Patient Table (Up-Down, In-Out) and Tilt movements

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-12
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

POWER Key Switch

The Mx8000 IDT is operated in Computer ON mode with Console

the key turned to the Gantry OFF position or in Scan Gantry Off Gantry On OFF ON

mode by turning the key to Gantry ON. On/Off Panel

System ON (Gantry ON) To Computer


SI_1_RXD

SI_1_TXD
Multi-Serial Controller
Turning the key to this position turns ON the entire Board SI_1_GND

system with all its components. The system is then CT-Box J100 Rack
ready for patient examination.
W865/6
J3 J7
Gantry ON Position
The Gantry ON Position activates relay K2 in the PDC
and enables full power supply for all components. The
Gantry ON Position also sends a status signal through
SDB
the SI_1 serial line to the Host.

PDC_24V

PDC-COMPON
PDC_COMPOLL

PDC_SYSON_L

PDC_SYSON

PDC_OFF
Computer ON (Gantry OFF) W54

The Computer ON (Gantry OFF) mode activates only


the Operating Station components by turning the Gantry
OFF switch. Scanning is not possible in this mode. K1

K2
PDC LOGO
Gantry OFF Position
The Gantry OFF Position activates relay K1 in the PDS
and enables a partial power supply. Status from the key
is read through the SI_1 serial line to the Host. The Figure 5-13: Gantry On and OFF Boards
operating station is ON in this mode.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-13
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

Scan Operation Board


The Scan Operation Board includes Function Keys, LED keys and an X-ray ON LED.

Function Keys

The following Function Keys control the scan:

MANUAL SCAN
The MANUAL light on the SCAN PANEL lights up indicating that the scanner is ready to perform a
single scan.

AUTO SCAN
The AUTO SCAN Button performs a series of scans without operator intervention.

PAUSE
The PAUSE/STOP Button interrupts the scanning series.

ENABLE
The ENABLE Button enables automatic Table and Gantry movements, e.g., after Plan on Surview
when the Table and Gantry move to the planned position and tilt.

Each key has the following two positions:


1. The first position controls hardware (a requirement for the safety of the system). This line goes to the MCU.
2. The second position controls the software and it goes to the Host through the SI_1 serial line. The MANUAL and AUTO
keys generate the same hardware signal (START).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-14
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

LED Keys

Each one of the keys includes LEDs which light up, via the Controller, when the applicable function is active.

X-ray ON LED

The X-ray ON LED displays the X-ray ON condition and it lights up during X-ray ON. X-ray ON also signals to the ACQ card for
X-ray ON.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-15
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

CT Box Controller W865/6


J3 J20
Controller
The CT Box Controller is a micro controller that Host
SI_1
handles all the CT Box functions. The Controller Comm SI1
To Host
has two serial communication interfaces to the Host; Manual
one for the optical encoders and the other for all the XI
Start_P
other CT Box devices.

Start_N

Auto

To/From
SDB Gantry
Pause

Hold_Meas_P

Hold Meas_N

Enable

Move_P

J11
Move_N
X-RAY_P To ACQ
From HV
X-Ray On LED X-RAY_N
Generator
RS485 lines
Encoder X-RAY_LED_POS
Scan Operation Board Board X-RAY_LED_NEG SDB

Figure 5-14: Scan Operation Board Diagram

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-16
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

Scan Control Box Replacement


Power Down the System

CAUTION Under no circumstances should you disconnect the Scan Control Box while it receives
power from the Host computer or from the GPC in the Gantry.
1. Host Computer
a. Open the Archive Manager.
b. Click File | Logout.
c. From the Logout window, click Shut Down, select Shut Down and click OK.
d. Press Ctrl twice to switch to the IRS computer.
2. IRS Computer
a. Close Master.exe.
b. Select Start | Shut Down and click OK.
3. Turn OFF Power
a. Turn OFF the ON/OFF switch on the Computer Rack door.
b. Turn OFF the output power from the UPS by pressing on OFF pushbutton.
c. Turn OFF the on-site power switch.
4. Disconnect the Scan Control Box from the cable connection in the Operators Table.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-17
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

Sony EOD Model RMO-S561Description


This section describes the controls, functions, and use of the SONY EOD drive Model RMO-S561.

Front Panel
The front panel functions are as follows (Figure 5-15):

# Unit Action Indication/Result


Power Switch Button pushed ON Button is depressed
1
Button pushed OFF Button is out
2 Power Indicator Power ON LED = Green
Busy Indicator When EOD inserted and drive ready for Read/Write Busy Indicator = Green
3
When accessing or writing data to drive Busy Indicator = Orange
4 Disk Insertion Slot Insert the cartridge into this slot.
Emergency Eject Hole

If the cartridge cannot be ejected using the EJECT


button (Button 6), turn OFF the power and insert the
5
supplied emergency eject tool into this hole to trip the
emergency eject mechanism.
Figure 5-15: RMO-S561 Front Panel

Eject button Press to eject EOD cartridge. When the write cache is enabled, it may take a
6 EJECT button is disabled with the function switch or few up to 45 seconds for the EOD to eject; data
software settings block ejection. in the cache must first be written to the EOD
5-5

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-18
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

Rear Panel
The rear panel functions are as follows (refer to Figure 5-16).

Unit Action Indication/Result


Set EOD functions to conform to Host computer and
1 Function Switches
software.
To set SCSI ID, press - to lower ID number; press
2 SCSI ID Switch
+ to raise ID number.
To connect SCSI cables (sold separately) linking the
3 SCSI Connectors
Host computer and other SCSI peripherals.
4 Air Duct To flow cooling air for EOD. Do not block the flow of air from the air duct.
To connect the ground terminals of other devices to
5 Frame Ground Terminal
the EOD frame ground.
AC Power Connector
6 To connect the supplied AC power cord.
(AC UB)

Figure 5-16: RMO-S561 Rear Panel

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-19
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

Using the EOD Drive


This section outlines the proper use of the EOD drive and EOD cartridges.

NOTE:

For optimum performance and reliability, we recommend that you use the optical disks for
ECD-9 (Sony M.O. 9.1GB EDM-9100B 4096 byte / sector).

CAUTION
NEVER TURN OFF POWER TO THE EOD DRIVE WHILE SYSTEM IS ON. FIRST SHUT
DOWN THE SYSTEM AND THEN THE DRIVE, OR DATA STORED ON THE CARTRIDGE
MAY BE LOST.

Formatting a Cartridge

The EOD cartridge is supplied by the manufacturer with low-level formatting. Only high-level formatting is necessary as follows:
1. Click on the Archive icon to open an Archive window (in a scan program).
2. Insert the EOD cartridge into the EOD drive.
3. Right-click the EOD icon. The right-click shortcut menu appears. Select Format.
Formatting the cartridge takes approximately 5 seconds.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-20
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

Reading / Writing to the EOD

1. Before using a new cartridge, format it (see Section "Formatting a Cartridge").


2. To Read /Write to the EOD, insert the formatted cartridge into the drive, and use the EOD device in the Archive Manager
window.

NOTE:

Be sure that the EOD media is not write protected.

Ejecting a Cartridge Mechanically

The EOD drive does not automatically eject an optical cartridge if a power failure occurs. An eject tool is shipped with the drive
to eject a cartridge manually.
Remove the cartridge from the SONY EOD drive as follows:
1. Shut down the system (using the Shutdown icon, or by pressing the ON/OFF button).
2. Disconnect the power to the drive.
3. Insert the eject tool into the small round hole on the drive front panel.

NOTE:

After manually ejecting a cartridge, the drive remains in eject position until power is restored. At
that time, the drive automatically resets itself.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-21
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

Labeling an Optical Disk Cartridge

Adhesive labels are included with each disk. Apply the


labels to the optical disk in an area that does not obstruct
the movement of the metal shutter. On side A of an
optical disk, the correct label position is just to the left of
the metal shutter. On side B, the correct position just to
the right of the metal shutter (see Figure 5-17).

Figure 5-17: Correct Label Positions

CAUTION
IF A LABEL IS APPLIED INCORRECTLY, THE DISK CARTRIDGE MAY GET CAUGHT IN
THE DRIVE.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-22
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

Write-protecting an Optical Disk

Each side of an optical disk can be write-protected by


sliding the write-protect button in the direction of the
arrow on the cartridge (see Figure 5-18).
On re-writable optical disks, the use of the write
protect button ensures data safety for files that
were previously written to the disk and prevents
any additional files from being written to the disk.
On write-once optical disks, existing files cannot
be altered or erased regardless of the
write-protect button position. However, the use
of the write-protect button prevents any additional
files being written to a disk.

Figure 5-18: Write-Protect Button Location

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-23
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Operator Console

Maintaining an Optical Disk

Observe the following guidelines to maintain your disk in good condition:


Do not expose the disk to extreme magnetic fields.
Do not expose the disk to dust particles.
Do not expose the disk to extreme temperatures or extreme humidity.
Do not drop the disk.
Do not open the shutter and touch the disk surface.
Do not dismantle disk cartridge.
Do not clean the disk's surface.
Do not insert disks with loosely attached labels into the drive.
Remove an old label before applying a new one.
Store the disk in a clean, safe place when it is not in use.
Make sure it is write protected when stored.

Periodic EOD Cartridge Maintenance


To ensure proper functioning of the EOD drive and to safeguard the clients data, perform the following actions:
Make sure that the cartridges are stored only in the original cartons.
Make sure that the cartridges do not come in contact with dust or any foreign matter.
Replace the cartridge immediately if there are signs of intermittent failure.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-24
Computer Rack

Overview
The Computer Rack consists of the following physical components:
Multi-Outlet (UPS Power Input from the PDC)
SDB (Signal Distribution Board)
ON/OFF Panel
Switch Box (KVM Switch)
Host ComputerDell 530 Pentium 4 XEON 1.7-GHz PC
or
Host ComputerDell 650 Pentium 4 XEON 3.06-GHz PC
Image Reconstruction System (IRS)

All connections between the Operator Console and the Computer Rack and Gantry run through the Signal Distribution Board
(SDB). Only the monitor, keyboard and mouse are connected directly to the Switch Box (KVM Switch) on the rear cover of the
Computer Rack.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-25
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5-6

Figure 5-19: Computer RackFront Figure 5-20: Computer RackRear

The Computer Rack can connect to all of the options (such as, LMI, EOD, External Floppy and Remote Control).
The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) receives power 230 VAC voltage from the Power Distribution Cabinet (PDC) and distributes
the voltage to all the components of the Operating station (see Figure 5-21).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-26
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5-7

RemoteMonitor
SVGA 775-7180-9803
Signalin
GantryMoni.)Cct(
CeilingHarness 775-7181-1601
CctHarness
CartHarnessCbl. 775-7181-1502
UpperTray
Local NetWork
VideoAmp.Op.
Sig.Output3
NetWork)Hub( Sig.Output2
IC720000010
Signal
Multi-Outlet PowerinCable IC720000009 P.S Sig.Output1
60Cm.Male/Fe.
ConsoleTable
Signalinput Op.Cbl.
)UPS(PS1/J1 Powerin
Powerin
PowerinCable IC720000009
PS2/J3
Monitor2
PowerinCable 4550-123-01411.
)UPS(PS1/J4 Powerin
UpperTrayGndCbl.775-7200-0190
PowerinCable775-7200-0300
PDC/X252 P-9 SignalMonitor
PS2/J1
PowerinCable)UPS( 775-7180-81 W-881
PDC/X254 P-8)UPS( Monitor1
PowerinCable 4550-123-01411.
)UPS(PS1/J2 Powerin
GndCable W-11
PDC/X100

4550-123-01391
GndSc.
PDU_GndCbl.775-7200-0180 PowerinCable IC720000008
EOD SignalMonitor
PS2/J2 Powerin
EodGndCbl.775-7200-0230

4550-123-01391
I.R.S SignalCable
Signal
PS1/J5)UPS( IC720000005
PowerinCable IC720000007 Scsi1-Scsi2
Computer
Powerin PS1/J4)UPS( Signal 4550-123-01421 Monitor2 Adapter
PowerinCable IC720000007 Monitor2
)UPS(PS1/J3 Powerin
Mouse
Cardiac USBCableIC720500003 USB-Exit
KeyBoard Sw.Box
Lan1GbRJ45 IC720000011 Lan1GbRJ45 4550-123-01421 Cpu1
Lan Lan Monitor1 Amp.)Comp.(Moni.in
Con.
Monitor NetCableIC720000014 Cpu2
LocalNet Net IRSMoniin
MonitorOut
IRS_GndCbl.775-7200-0220
S.D.B MultiSerialCable775-7200-0161 Key-Board
IC720000006
K.BComp.in
Cpu1 Con.
4550-123-01401
Ds-1 AcqCont.Cbl. 775-7200-0100
P-30 MultiSerial
IRS-K.Bin
Cpu2
K.BOut
Key-Board
J-1 J-11 AcqDiag.Com.775-7200-0150
P-10 Com-2 IC720000006 Cpu1 Con.
Mouse MouseCompin 4550-123-01401
J-20
Ct-BoxKeys775-7200-0170
Com-1 IRSMousein
Cpu2
MouseOut
Mouse
12VForFansCbl. 775-7200-0290 P.Host
12VP.S P-24 AudioOutCbl. IC720000002
J-13 Audio Microphone
C.I.B Cable775-7200-0120 Comp.GndCbl.775-7200-0210
P.D.C Cable W-54 J-4 C.I.B
PDC/X250 X-2 Ct-Box
Ct-BoxCable 4550-123-01381. 4550-123-01381
G.P.C Cable 775-7180-80 W-880 J-3 J-100
GPC/X1 P-5

GantryCable W-50
On/Off Panel
MCU/X13 X-1
J-7
OnOffCable775-7200-0110
P-1
IC720000015 775-7200-0260
FrontdoorGndCbl.775-7200-0200
Op.FiberAdapter
AcqOpticalFiberCable W-55
DS100000001 E400/X2
IC720000012 2.5 M. Male/Female. IC720000012

IC720000006 2.5 M. Male/Male. IC720000006

IC720000006 2.5 M. Male/Male. IC720000006

Figure 5-21: Computer Rack Block Diagram

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-27
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

The Computer Rack includes the following interfaces:


Power input from PDC
USB Interface Adapter
Optical fiber link for data transfer from the RCOM to the ACQ
Serial communication and control lines to/from MCU
Can bus communication with the Gantry
Audio signal lines with the Gantry
Stop Report chain
Network interface adapter for local network connection

An ON/OFF switch:
Turns OFF the Computer Rack and Gantry systems
Turns ON the Computer Rack only

The ON switch activates power from the PDC (UPS) to the Computer Rack. The IRS and Host Computers must be switched
ON separately.
The Computer Rack consists of two major computing and processing systems:
Host Computer
Image Reconstruction System (IRS)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-28
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Multi-Outlet (PDUPower Distribution Unit)


The Multi-Outlet receives UPS power 230V from the PDC (Power Distribution Cabinet) and distributes the voltage to all the
components of the Operating Station.
5-8

GND

Figure 5-22: Multi-Outlet

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-29
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-3 lists the power supply from the PDC to the Multi-Outlet on the computer rack.

Table 5-3: Power Supply from PDC to the Computer Rack

PDC
MULTI-OUTLET CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION
CONNECTOR
X253 P9 Power in cable
X254 P8 Power in cable
X100 GND GND from PDC

Table 5-4 lists the power distribution from the Multi-Outlet to all components.

Table 5-4: UPS Power Supply from the Multi-Outlet to the Internal Devices

MULTI-OUTLET CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION


PS1/J1 Power out to the Video Amp.
PS1/J2 Power out to the monitor (W865/1)
PS1/J3 Power out to the Host computer
PS1/J4 Power out to the IRS
PS2/J1 Power out to the AMC-4
PS2/J2 Power out to the EOD
PS2/J3 Power out to the Network Switch

SDB (Signal Distribution Board)


The SDB is the interface between the Computer Rack of the Operator Console and the Gantry. The SDB includes all the
connectors (see Figure 5-23) which distribute the signals to the system. The board is passive; it does not include an electronic
circuit.
Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-30
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-5 lists the connections from the SDB to the system elements.

Table 5-5:

TYPE SDB CONNECTOR DESTINATION DESCRIPTION


System Cables Gantry X1 MCU X13 Gantry cable W50
System Cables PDC X2 X250 PSC cable W54+UPS COM
System Cables GPC P5 X1 GPC cable W880
ONN/OFF Panel J7 P1 ON/OFF Panel
IRS J11 J1 ACQ Control Cable
P24 12V Power Supply 12V from IRS Power Supply to Computer Rack Fans
Computer J4 CIB CIB Cable
J13 Audio Audio-out Cable
J20 COM1 CT Box Keys
P10 Com2 ACQ Diag. COM
P30 Multi-Serial Multi-Serial
CT Box J3 J100 CT Box Cable W865

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-31
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5-9

Figure 5-23: SDB Connector Configuration

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-32
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

The figures on the following pages show the pin layout for the connectors on the SDB.

4
D_Type 50 Male St. GANTRY D_Type 50 Female St. CT_BOX D_Type 62 Male
D_Type 25 Female St.
MULTI_SERIAL
COMM_GND
GND_CIB ACQ 7200
COMM_POS NOISE_CANCEL_TXD1
12V_CIB
COMM_NEG NOISE_CANCEL_RXD1
12V_CIB ACQ_OK_POS

D
GND_CIB R1 ACQ_OK_NEG
SRL_2
GND_CIB
SRL_0 INJECTOR_RXD2 COM_OK_POS
PDC_OFF

COM_OK_POS
COM_OK_NEG
B 12V_CIB

PDC_SYSON
PDC_COMPON
DS1 INJECTOR_TXD2 COM_OK_NEG
TRIGGER_IN1_POS
TRIGGER_IN1_NEG
TRIGGER_IN2_POS
ACQ_OK_POS PDC_COMPON_L DCD8
TRIGGER_IN2_NEG
ACQ_OK_NEG XRAY_LAMP_P MCU_MONITOR_TXD3
EN_ACQ_OK_POS
PDC_SYSON_L MCU_MONITOR_RXD3
TRIGGER_IN1_POS EN_ACQ_OK_NEG
XRAY_LAMP_N
TRIGGER_IN1_NEG
SRL_2
XRAY_ON_POS
SRL_1 RXD_2 XRAY_ON_NEG
TRIGGER_IN2_POS TXD_2 ECG_TXD
START_P
TRIGGER_IN2_NEG
ENABLE_P ECG_RXD
MCU_MONITOR_RXD3 DTR_1
START_N ECG_GND
EN_ACQ_OK_POS DCD_1
ENABLE_N
EN_ACQ_OK_NEG NOISE_CANCEL_GND AUX_TXD
PAUSE_N
MCU_MONITOR_TXD3 EXT_RXD5 AUX_RXD
PAUSE_P
XRAY_ON_POS EXT_TXD5 AUX_GND
SI_1_TXD1
XRAY_ON_NEG DSR5 ACQ_RXD
SI_1_RXD1
MCU_MONITOR_GND DTR5
SI_GND ACQ_TXD
START_P DCD5
SI_GND ACQ_GND
START_N EXT_GND
SI_GND
MIC_CT_BOX SI_2_TXD2 EXT_TXD6
ENABLE_P EXT_RXD6

C
SI_2_RXD2
ENABLE_N DATSENDERP1 DTR6
MIC_CT_BOX_R SI_GND DSR6
PAUSE_P EXT_RXD7
DATSENDERN1
PAUSE_N EXT_TXD7
RESETNEG1
MIC_GANTRY DSR7
XRAY_LAMP_P
RESETPOS1
DATEMPFP1 DTR7 J_11
XRAY_LAMP_N DCD7
12V_GPC
MIC_GANTRY_R

ECG_GND
A DATEMPFN1
GND_GPC
GND_GPC
12V_GPC
R2
EXT_GND
EXT_RXD8
EXT_TXD8
DSR8 D_Type 09 Male St.
ECG_RXD DTR8
ECG_TXD
12V_GPC DS2 12V FOR FANS
LINE_OUT_RIGHT
INJECTOR_GND INJECTOR_GND
GND_GPC
INJECTOR_RXD2
LINE_OUT_RET
INJECTOR_TXD2 GND_1
LINE_OUT_RET
NOISE_CANCEL_GND DCD6 FAN_12V
LINE_OUT_LEFT
NOISE_CANCEL_RXD1 MCU_MONITOR_GND FAN_RET
MIC_GANTRY
NOISE_CANCEL_TXD1 FAN_12V
X_1 MIC_CT_BOX
MIC_GANTRY_R FAN_RET
J_3 MIC_CT_BOX_R P FAN_12V
FAN_RET

CTS_1

CTS5
RTS5
P_24
CTS6
RTS6
CTS7
RTS7
CTS8
P_30 RTS8

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-33
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

D_Type 09 Fmale St. D_Type 09 Male St. D_Type 09 Male St. D_Type 09 Male St. D_Type 09 Male St.
D_Type 09 Female St. EXTERNAL - 6 EXTERNAL - 7
WINDOW_SERIAL_I/F_2 ACQ_AUX UPS_IRS EXTERNAL - 5
DCD5 DCD6 DCD7
DCD_1
DSR5 DSR6 DSR7
EXT_RXD5 EXT_RXD6 EXT_RXD7
SI_2_RXD2 AUX_RXD
RTS5 RTS6 RTS7
EXT_TXD5 EXT_TXD6 EXT_TXD7
SI_2_TXD2 AUX_TXD
CTS5 CTS6 CTS7
CTS_1
DTR5 DTR6 DTR7
DTR_1

EXT_GND EXT_GND EXT_GND


SI_GND AUX_GND GND_1

J_21 J_23 P_25 P_26 P_27


P_22

D_Type 25 Female St. D_Type15 Male St. D_Type 09 Male St. D_Type15 Male St. D_Type15 Female St.
KEYS_SERIAL_I/F_1 G.P.C EXTERNAL - 8 P.D.C C.I.B

DCD8 COMM_GND
DATSENDERN1 DSR8 PDC_OFF COMM_NEG
SI_1_RXD1 DATSENDERP1 EXT_RXD8 PDC_24V COMM_POS
RTS8 PDC_COMPON_L SRL_1
SI_1_TXD1 EXT_TXD8 PDC_COMPON SRL_0
RESETNEG1 CTS8 PDC_SYSON_L GND_CIB
RESETPOS1 DTR8 PDC_SYSON 12V_CIB
DATEMPFN1 GND_CIB
DATEMPFP1 EXT_GND GND_1 12V_CIB
GND_GPC RXD_2
12V_GPC TXD_2
GND_GPC P_28 CTS_1
SI_GND 12V_GPC GND_1
GND_GPC DTR_1
12V_GPC DCD_1

P_5 X_2 J_4

J_20

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-34
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Mate-N-Lok 2 Female
FAN_1
FAN_12V
D_Type 09 Female St. FAN_RET
REMOTE COMP.ON D_Type 09 Male St.
SYSTEM OFF ACQ DIAGNOSTIC J_9A
PDC_COMPON_L
PDC_24V ACQ_TXD Mate-N-Lok 2 Female
PDC_24V FAN_2
ACQ_RXD
FAN_12V
PDC_OFF FAN_RET
PDC_OFF
PDC_COMPON ACQ_GND
J_9B
J_7 P_10
Mate-N-Lok 2 Female
FAN_3
Streo_Phone Female
AUDIO FAN_12V
FAN_RET
LINE_OUT_RET
LINE_OUT_RIGHT
J_9C
LINE_OUT_LEFT

J_13

Switch Box (KVM Switch)


The Switch Box (KVM Switch) is a control unit that allows access to two PC systems (IRS and Host Computer) from a single
console (keyboard, mouse, and monitor).
The Switch Box (KVM Switch) provides two convenient methods to access the PCs connected to the system: using the push
button Selection switch located on the units top panel; and entering Hot Key (double-click on Ctrl) from the keyboard.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-35
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5-10

Selection Switch

Mouse Mouse

Host (CPU1)
IRS (CPU2)

Keyboard Keyboard

Monitor Monitor

Mouse Keyboard Monitor

TO CONSOLE

Figure 5-24: Switch Box (KVM Switch) Connections

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-36
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Host Computer

Overview
The Mx8000 IDT host computer is supplied in two configurations:
The Dell 530 workstation was supplied with all systems until S/N 3256 excluding systems S/N 3250 and 3251.
The Dell 650 workstation was cut into production from system S/N 3257 and also systems 3250, 3251.

The Dell 650 computer is supplied as an FRU for all Mx8000 IDT systems.
The Mx8000 IDT uses a Dell 530 Pentium 4 XEON 1.7GHz PC computer / Dell 650 650 Pentium 4 XEON 3.06 GHz.
The Host computer includes the following components:
Table 5-6:

DELL 530 DELL 650


Hard disk of 146 GB 10K RPM for images and the operating software
Hard disk 36GB for images and the operating software storage
storage
Motherboard with 5 PCI slots (3 x 64bit and 2 x 32 bit) and an AGP
Mother board with 5 PCI slots (2 x 64bit and 3 x 32 bit)
Pro connector for the video card
Monitor card to support 4096 colors and 256 gray levels for image,
Monitor card nVIDEA Quadro4 980 with two digital outputs (for two
overlays, text, and graphics with display rate of at least 10
monitors)
images/sec
SCSI interface to support the connection to an EOD storage device SCSI interface to support the connection to an EOD storage device
CD-ROM drive for software loading DVD-ROM drive for software loading
RAM memory of 2-GB with an upgrade option to 4-GB
Audio card (on-board) to support the intercom operation to and from the Gantry
On board (10/100) network connection to hospital network

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-37
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-6:

DELL 530 DELL 650


LAN card to support connection to the IRS at a rate of 1-Gbit/sec
Standard keyboard and mouse
The serial port and parallel port are used to connect external devices such as AMC box (for non-DICOM printers), noise cancellation,
injector, and for connection to the SDB
Multi-Serial card with 8 serial ports (such as Balancing Control Card, UPS Control)
CAN Interface Board (CIB) for communication with the Gantry
3.5 floppy drive

Windows XP
Mx8000 IDT is based on the Microsoft Windows XP operating systems. The user is presumed to have a basic knowledge of
working in a Windows environment. For help regarding Windows operating systems, refer to the operating system
documentation.

Safety
Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer system from potential damage and to ensure your own
personal safety.

CAUTION
TO ENSURE FOR SAFETY, TURN OFF THE UPS (INSIDE THE PDC) BY PRESSING THE
ON / OFF PUSH BUTTON AND DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE (FROM THE
PDC) FROM THE RACK COMPUTER.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-38
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

When Working Inside Your Computer

Before you open the computer cover, perform the following steps in the sequence indicated.

NOTE:

Do not attempt to service the computer yourself, except as explained in the Service Manual
on-line Dell documentation or otherwise provided to you. Always follow installation and service
instructions closely.

CAUTION
THERE IS A DANGER OF A NEW BATTERY EXPLODING IF IT IS INCORRECTLY
INSTALLED. REPLACE THE BATTERY ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE
RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISCARD USED BATTERIES ACCORDING
TO THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS.

1. Turn OFF the computer and any peripherals.


Disconnect your computer and devices from their power sources. Also, disconnect any telephone or network lines from
the computer. Doing so reduces the potential for personal injury or shock.
2. Wear a wrist grounding strap, and clip it to an unpainted metal surface, such as the padlock loop on the back of the chassis
(see Figure 5-25). If a wrist grounding strap is not available, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on
the chassis, such as the power supply, to discharge any static charge from your body before touching anything inside your
computer.
While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis to dissipate any static electricity
that might harm internal components. Also avoid touching components or contacts on a card and avoid touching pins on
a chip.
3. Disconnect your computer and peripherals from their power sources.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-39
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Before disconnecting a peripheral device from the computer, wait 10 to 20 seconds after disconnecting the computer from
its electrical outlet. Before removing a component from the system board, verify that the standby power light on the
system board has turned off. To locate this light, see "System Board Components" or "Interior Service Label" in the Dell
Service Manual.
In addition, take note of these safety guidelines when appropriate:
When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain- relief loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have
a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before disconnecting
the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you
connect a cable, make sure both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned.
Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges
or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a microprocessor chip by its edges, not by its pins.

Protecting Against ESD Anti-static Discharge

Static electricity can harm delicate components inside your computer. To prevent static damage, discharge static electricity from
your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components, such as the microprocessor. You can do so by
touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
As you continue to work inside the computer, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to remove any static charge your
body may have accumulated.
You can also take the following steps to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD):
When unpacking a static-sensitive component from its shipping carton, do not remove the component from the antistatic
packing material until you are ready to install the component in your computer. Just before unwrapping the antistatic
packaging, be sure to discharge static electricity from your body.
When transporting a sensitive component, first place it in an antistatic container or packaging.
Handle all sensitive components in a static-safe area. If possible, use antistatic floor pads and workbench pads.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-40
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Dell 530
Front View of Your Computer
The following figures show the controls, lights, and other features on the front panel of your computer. The drive door can open
and fold against the side of the computer. This allows fully unobstructed use of the externally accessible drives.
5-11 5-12

Figure 5-25: Front View of the Computer Figure 5-26: Front View of the Computer (Doors Open)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-41
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Controls and Lights


Power button controls the computer's AC input power (see Table 5-7 below).

Table 5-7: Power Button Functions

POWER BUTTON FUNCTIONS


POWER BUTTON FUNCTION
COMPUTER STATUS

OFF Press and release to turn the computer on.

Press and hold for more than 6 seconds to immediately turn the computer off.
ON
NOTE: Use this method only if the computer will not shut down normally.

Power light illuminates in two colors and blinks or remains solid to indicate different states.
Diskette-drive access light illuminates when the drive is reading data from, or writing data to, a diskette. Wait until this
light turns off before you remove a diskette from the drive.
Hard-drive access light illuminates when a hard drive is reading data from, or writing data to, the drive.
Diagnostic lights a series of lights that can help you diagnose a problem with your computer.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-42
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Back View of Your Computer


The following figure shows the connectors and other features on the back of the Host computer.
5-13

Serial Port 1 CT
Parallel Port to AMC
Serial Port 2
ACQ Diag
Cover Release Latch
PS/2 Keyboard
Mic In PS/2 Mouse
Audio
Network to Ext. Devices
USB
Monitor
SCSI Security Cable Slot
CIB Connector
Multi-Serial Connector
Padlock Ring
1-Gbit Lan to IRS

AC Power Connector

Figure 5-27: Back View of the Computer

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-43
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Connecting Devices
When you connect external devices to your computer's back panel, follow these guidelines:
Check the documentation that accompanied the device for specific installation and configuration instructions.
For example, you must connect most devices to a particular I/O port or connector to operate properly. Also, external
devices like a printer usually require you to load device drivers before they will work.
Always attach external devices while your computer is turned off. Then turn on the computer before turning on any
external devices, unless the documentation for the device specifies otherwise.

CAUTION
BEFORE DISCONNECTING A DEVICE FROM THE COMPUTER, WAIT 10 TO 20 SECONDS
AFTER TURNING OFF THE COMPUTER TO AVOID POSSIBLE DAMAGE TO THE SYSTEM
BOARD.

Speaker/Headphone Jack

Used to connect computer speakers, headphones, or other audio output devices. This jack is amplified to support headphones.

IEEE 1394 (FireWire) Connector

Used to attach high-speed serial multimedia devices. For more information, see "IEEE 1394 (FireWire)."

Serial Port Connectors

An I/O port on your computer that transfers data sequentially, one bit at a time. Also referred to as a COM port.
Default serial port designations:COM1 (port 1) for the CT Box and COM2 (port 2) for ACQ Diagnostics.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-44
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Parallel Port Connector

An I/O port on your computer that transfers data eight bits at a time. It uses a 25-pin, female subminiature-D connector, typically
to connect a printer. Also referred to as an LPT port (non-DICOM printer, using the AMC option).

NOTE:

The integrated parallel port is automatically disabled if the computer detects an installed expansion card containing a
parallel port configured to the same address as specified in the Parallel Port option in system setup.

SCSI Interface

Small computer system interface. A high-speed interface that is used to connect an external EOD device to a computer. The
SCSI can connect up to seven devices using a single controller. Each device is accessed by an individual ID number on the
SCSI controllers bus.

Audio Connectors

The audio controller provides connection to the Gantry via the SDB panel (for AutoVoice).

Mic In Connector

The Mic In connector is used to connect the Dell microphone for voice recording.

PS/2 Mouse Connector

Attach the Logitech PS/2 mouse cable to the 6-pin mouse connector on the back panel.

NOTE:
This connector is similar to the keyboard connector. Ensure that you correctly identify the
mouse connector before you connect the device.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-45
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

PS/2 Keyboard Connector

Attach the PS/2 keyboard cable to the 6-pin keyboard connector on the back panel.

NOTE:

This connector is similar to the mouse connector. Ensure that you correctly identify the
keyboard connector before you connect the device.

Network Adapters

Onboard Network Adapter


The onboard network adapter is used to connect the computer to external devices through the Internet such as DICOM devices,
MxView, etc.
A yellow network activity light flashes when the computer is transmitting or receiving network data. (A high volume of
network traffic may make this light appear to be in a steady "ON" state.)
A dual-colored network link and speed light, which is green when a good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network
and the computer, or is orange when a good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. When
the light is off, the computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-46
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Host Computer Block Diagram


The block diagram in Figure 5-28 displays the host computer and its relationship to all the elements in the Mx8000 IDT system.
5-14 5-15

EOD DRIVE
Gantry Video Card
IRS I-Box
USB
Monitor SCSI (Cardiac option)
Video
Card Adapter

Keyboard Switch Box SCSI Adapter System


(KVM Switch) SCSI I/F
(on board) Disk
Mouse
HOST COMPUTER
Multi-Serial
AMC Printer Parallel Card CIBCard
(option) (on board)
Scan Control
(CT) Box

Ethernet
10/100 LAN
Audio
Multi-serial
Port
Switch (on board)
(on board)

SDB 1-GB LAN Card


1-Gbit LAN
External CIB Card
Card IDE
DICOM
Device

IRS DVD-ROM/ Gantry


Floppy
Computer CD-ROM MCU
Figure 5-29: Host Computer Card Layout
Figure 5-28: Host Computer Block Diagram
5-16

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-47
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

System Cables

Figure 5-30 shows all potential connectivity throughout the computer. Connectivity is provided by the system board and front
panel.

NOTE:

The control panel shown in Figure 5-30 is mounted to the


front of the chassis frame. It controls the power button,
power light, and hard-drive access light. The chassis
intrusion switch and the chassis speaker are mounted
inside the computer cover.

Figure 5-30:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-48
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

System Board Components

Figure 5-31 shows the principal connectors and components on the system board.
5-17

Figure 5-31: System Board Components


Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-49
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Front Panel Components

The front panel provides connectivity for the computer front I/O panel as well as several components located inside the chassis.
Figure 5-32 shows the principal connectors on the front panel. Table 5-8 lists the connectors on the front panel and their
respective labels.
5-18

Table 5-8: Front Panel Labels

FRONT PANEL
LABELS DESCRIPTION
CONNECTOR

1394 System board IEEE 1394 connector


1394_FNT IEEE 1394 connector
AUDIO System board audio connector
CTRL_PNL Control panel connector
DIAGLED Diagnostic lights
EXT_SPKR Chassis speaker connector
FNT_PNL System board connector
HP_OUT Speaker/headphone jack
Figure 5-32: Front Panel Principal Connectors
INTRUDER Chassis intrusion switch connector
USB_FNT Port 2 USB connectors (2)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-50
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

System Board Jumpers

Figure 5-33 shows the location of the jumpers on the system board.
Table 5-9 lists the system board jumpers and their settings. To change a jumper setting, pull the plug off its pin(s) and carefully
fit it down onto the pin(s) indicated.
5-19

Table 5-9:

SYSTEM-BOARD
JUMPER SETTINGS SETTING DESCRIPTION
JUMPER
(default)
Password features are
PSWD
enabled.

Password features are


disabled.

RTCRST Real-time clock reset.


Figure 5-33: System Motherboard Jumper Placement
jumpered unjumpered

2j
5-20

CAUTION
BEFORE CHANGING A JUMPER SETTING, VERIFY THAT THE STANDBY POWER LIGHT
ON THE SYSTEM BOARD HAS TURNED OFF. OTHERWISE, DAMAGE TO YOUR
COMPUTER OR UNPREDICTABLE RESULTS MAY OCCUR.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-51
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Host BIOS Configuration


The following table lists the BIOS configuration for the Dell 530 computer.

System Time<current time> PCI IRQ assignment..<do not touch, may change between
System Date.<current date> computers>
Diskette Drive a:..3.5 inch, 1.44 MB IRQ Reservation<do not touch>
Primary Drive 0off System Security.[Enter]
Primary Drive 1off 1. Password Statusunlocked
Secondary Drive 0CD-ROM Reader Keyboard num lock.on
Secondary Drive 1off Report Keyboard Error..Report
Hard-Disk Drive Sequence...[Enter] Auto Power on..disabled
System BIOS boot devices Remote Wake Up...off
Hard-Disk SCSI Device (Disk ID) AC Power Recovery..off
Boot Sequence..[Enter] Fast Bootoff
Diskette drive a: Suspend ModeS1
Hard-Disk Drive c: OS Installation Mode..off
IDE CD-ROM
System Memory<amount of memory (3048MB)>
AGP Aperture...128MB
CPU Information[Enter]
Speed.Normal
Bus Speed.100Mhz
Processor 0 ID<ID>
Clock Speed<Speed>
L2 Cach2 Size.<Cache Size>
Integrated Devices..[Enter]
Sound..on

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-52
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Troubleshooting the Dell 530


Diagnostics With the Dell ResourceCD

The Dell Diagnostics tests check your computer's hardware without additional equipment and without the risk of destroying data.
When the diagnostics tests complete without indicating any problems, you can have confidence in your computer's operation. If
the tests indicate a problem you cannot solve by yourself, the test results provide important information you will need when
talking to Dell's service and support personnel.

NOTE:

Only use the Dell Diagnostics to test your Dell computer. Using this program with other
computers may cause incorrect computer responses or result in error messages. Also, only
use the Dell Diagnostics that came with your computer or an updated version of the program
for your computer. Do not use Dell Diagnostics from another model Dell computer.

Features

The diagnostic test groups features allow you to take the following actions:
Perform quick checks or extensive tests on one or all devices
Choose the number of times a test group or sub-test is repeated
Display or print test results or save them in a file
Suspend testing if an error is detected or terminate testing when an adjustable error limit is reached
Access online Help screens that describe the tests and tell how to run them
Read status messages that inform you whether test groups or sub-tests completed successfully
Receive error messages that appear if problems are detected

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-53
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Before You Start Testing

Read "Safety FirstFor You and Your Computer" and the safety instructions in your System Information Guide.
Turn ON your printer if one is attached, and ensure that it is online.

Dell ResourceCD

Use the Dell ResourceCD to perform hardware diagnostics as follows:


1. While the system is ON, insert the Dell PrecisionTM ResourceCDTM into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Restart the computer. While the computer boots up, press F12 (Boot Menu) when the message appears on the upper
right side of the screen.
3. Select "Boot From CD" from the menu and press <Enter>.
4. The computer boots up from the CD and a blue language menu screen appears. Press 1 for English or select any other
language.
5. An options menu appears. The following options are the only ones recommended for use:
Option 2 - Run Dell Diagnostics
Option 4 - SCSI Hard Drive Diagnostics
Option 7 - Video Diagnostic
Option 8 - Copy Hard Drive Controller Drivers to Diskette
Option 9 - Exit to DOS

Option 2 - Run Dell Diagnostics


Loads the Dell Diagnostics utility that allows you to perform tests and helps determine if your computer has possible
problems. When the Diagnostics menu appears, select one of the options to continue.

Option 4 - SCSI Hard Drive Diagnostics


Runs a diagnostic test on your SCSI hard Drive(s).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-54
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

NOTE:

The SCSI hard drive diagnostics are intended for computer with SCSI hard drives and will
ignore IDE hard drives.

CAUTION
THE SCSI HARD DRIVE DIAGNOSTIC CAN CAUSE DATA LOSS. BACK UP ANY
IMPORTANT DATA BEFORE YOU RUN THE TEST.

Option 7 - Video Diagnostic


Displays a list of video controllers that can be installed in your computer and then runs diagnostic tests on the video controller
you select.
To find out what video adapter you have, click the from the Windows Start menu click Settings | Control Panel and double-click
the Display icon. In the Display Properties window, click the Settings tab. For Windows NT, click Display Type to list the video
adapter.
After a diagnostic test runs, it tells you whether the test passed or failed. You can isolate the part of the video subsystem that
is experiencing a problem by determining which tests pass or fail.

Option 8 - Copy Hard Drive Controller Drivers to Diskette


Allows you to select and copy the hard drive controller driver appropriate for your computer to a diskette.

Option 9 - Exit to DOS


Exits the main menu and returns to a M-DOS prompt, at which point you can remove the ResourceCD and restart the system.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-55
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Running Dell Diagnostics (Option 2)

1. The Diagnostic menu appears:


a. Select "Program Options" to set the variables for the diagnosed tests and press <Enter>:
Use the arrow keys to scroll through each variable and the spacebar to modify the variable (press Delete to reset
the variable to zero).
Press <Esc> to return to the main menu.
b. Select "Test All Devices" and press <Enter>.
c. Select "Extended Tests". A message appears instructing you to make sure that all removable media devices contain
media. Press any key to continue.

NOTE:

Press Control+Break to abort the tests.

d. The diagnostic application finishes testing all devices.


e. For a summary of the results, select "Information and Results" and press <Enter>.
f. Select "Errors" to view any errors. Press <Esc> to return to the main menu.
g. In case there are errors in any component, a specific test should be performed as follows:
h. Select "Test One Device" and press <Enter>.
i. Select the relevant device and press <Enter>. Press <Enter> to select the device again and select "Extended
Test". Press <Enter> to initialize the test.
j. When test is finished press any key to return to the main menu.
k. Select "Device Configuration" and press <Enter>. The Devices for All Groups window appears. This window
displays all devices with explanations.
l. Press <Esc> to return to the main menu and select "Exit to MS-DOS" and press <Enter>.
m. Eject the CD and reboot the computer.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-56
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Troubleshooting with LEDs

Power LED States


LED PATTERN CAUSE
The power and hard drive LEDs of the
Workstation 530 can display diagnostic LED The Power Supply may have failed.
patterns. These can prove invaluable when This state indicates the system has power, but the
troubleshooting No P.O.S.T. / No Video POWER_GOOD signal is not yet active.
situations. As always, these are only meant to
serve as indicators of potential issues. Formal The computer is in the S1 or S3 suspended state.
and complete troubleshooting should be Check the Diagnostic LED's to determine which state.
performed to verify hardware failures.

The Voltage Regulator Module may have failed.


Check the diagnostic LED's for further information.

Indicates the POWER_GOOD signal is active and it is


probable that the
Power Supply is OK.
Check the diagnostic LED's for further information.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-57
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Diagnostic LEDs
The WorkStation 530 also ships with the Diagnostic LEDs. The four LED's are labeled "A, B, C, D" and are incorporated on the
front I/O panel of the Tesla chassis (see Figure 5-34). These LEDs serve as a diagnostic aid for troubleshooting systems
exhibiting a No Post, No Video symptom.

The four LED's can exist in one of three states: Off,


5-21

Amber, or Green. The various combinations of the LED's


can be used to diagnose system failures (see table Headphone Output
below). However, remember that these codes are only
indicators of system problems. Technicians should
troubleshoot an issue to verify the diagnostic code.

Secondary USB Ports

IEEE 1394 Port

Diagnostic LEDs

Figure 5-34: Dell 530 Diagnostic LEDs


5-22

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-58
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Pre-POST Diagnostic LED Patterns


STATE LED PATTERN STATE DESCRIPTION STATE LED PATTERN STATE DESCRIPTION

System is unplugged or there is no Bad Power Supply or Power Supply


Pb0 Pb4
wall power cable is crimped

Pb1 Normal power of mode, "Soft OFF" Pb5 On board regulator failure

System on, Power is good, BIOS not


Pb3 Pb6 CPU or VRM mismatch
executing

Regulators on memory riser B are


Pf1 VRM0 is bad Pf5 bad

Regulators on memory riserA and B


Pf2 VRM1 is bad Pf7
are bad

Regulators on memory riser A are


Pf3 Both VRM0 and VRM1 are bad Pf4
bad

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-59
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

POST Diagnostic LED Patterns


STATE STATE
STATE LED PATTERN STATE DESCRIPTION STATE LED PATTERN STATE DESCRIPTION
NAME NAME
AC power not available,
the system is unplugged PCI device configuration
S0- OFF from the wall, or power S4 PCI activity is in progress or a PCI
cables are not installed failure was detected
properly

Video subsystem
configuration activity is in
S5 VID
progress or a video
subsystem failure

BIOS checksum failure


Storage device configuration
was detected and the
S1 RCM S6 STO in progress or storage
system is now in Recovery
subsystem failure
Mode

USB subsystem
CPU configuration activity
configuration activity in
S2 CPU is in progress or a CPU S7 USB
progress or USB subsystem
failure was detected
failure

Memory subsystem
configuration activity is in Fatal motherboard failure
S3 MEM S9 MBF
progress or a memory detected
failure was detected

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-60
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

STATE STATE
STATE LED PATTERN STATE DESCRIPTION STATE LED PATTERN STATE DESCRIPTION
NAME NAME

Indicates routine system Indicates routine system


S11 PRV activity preceding video S14 POV activity subsequent video
initialization initialization

Indicates End of POST


process and the LEDs
System resource
S12 CFG S15 STD remain in this pattern until the
configuration in progress
system is switched OFF or
reset

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-61
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Troubleshooting with Error Messages

Errors That Halt The System


These errors will not allow the system to boot.
Alert! Processor Cache Size Mismatch. Install like processors or one processor. System Halted!
Alert! Processor Type Mismatch. Install like processors or one processor. System Halted!
Alert! Processor Speed Mismatch. Install like processors or one processor. System Halted!

Errors That Soft Halt The System


These errors prompt the user for F1 to Continue or F2 to go into Setup.

Alert! Card-cage fan not detected. Alert! Previous shutdown due to thermal event.
Alert! CPU 0 failed Built-In Self Test (BIST). Alert! Previous voltage failure.
Alert! CPU 1 failed Built-In Self Test (BIST). Alert! Processor Stepping Mismatch. Install like processors or one
Alert! CPU 0 fan not detected. processor.
Alert! CPU 1 fan not detected. Alert! System battery voltage is low.
Alert! Chipset heat sink not detected. Alert! Unable to initialize all installed memory.
Alert! Power supply fan failure. Alert! Uncorrectable memory error previously detected. Address:
XXXXXXXXh, Device RIMM_Y
Alert! Previous fan failure.
Please connect USB keyboard/Mouse to USB port(s) on the back
Alert! Previous processor thermal failure.
of the computer.
Alert! Previous reboot was due to voltage
Plug & Play Configuration Error.
regulator failure.

Errors That Display A Warning Message


These errors wait for a few seconds and then allow the system to continue to boot.
Alert! Cover was previously removed.

Additional System-Generated Error Messages


The following table lists all of the Workstation error messages.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-62
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-10: Workstation Error Messages

MESSAGE CAUSE

Address mark not found The BIOS found a faulty disk sector or could not find a particular disk sector.
Attachment failed to respond The diskette drive or hard drive controller cannot send data to the associated
drive.
Bad command or file name The command you entered does not exist or the file name you specified is faulty.
Bad error-correction code (ECC) on disk read The diskette drive or hard drive controller detected an uncorrectable read error.
Controller has failed The hard drive or the associated controller is defective.
Data error The diskette or hard drive cannot read the data.
Decreasing available memory One or more RAMbus in-line memory modules (RIMMs) may be faulty or
improperly seated.
Diskette drive 0 seek failure A cable may be loose, or the system configuration information may not match
the hardware configuration.
Diskette read failure A cable may be loose, or the diskette may be faulty.
Diskette subsystem reset failed The diskette drive controller may be faulty.
Diskette write protected The diskette write-protect feature is activated.
Drive not ready No diskette is in the drive. The operation requires a diskette in the drive before
it can continue.
Gate A20 failure One or more memory modules may be loose.
General failure The operating system is unable to carry out the command.
Hard disk configuration error The hard drive failed initialization.
Hard disk controller failure The hard drive failed initialization.
Hard disk failure
Hard drive read failure

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-63
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-10: Workstation Error Messages (Cont)

MESSAGE CAUSE

Invalid configuration information - please run SETUP program The system configuration information does not match the hardware
configuration.
Keyboard controller failure A cable or connector may be loose, or the keyboard or keyboard/mouse
Keyboard failure controller may be faulty.
Keyboard stuck key failure
Memory address line failure at address, read value expecting One or more memory modules may be faulty or improperly seated.
value
Memory allocation error The software you are attempting to run is conflicting with the operating system
or another application program or utility.
Memory data line failure at address, read value expecting One or more memory modules may be faulty or improperly seated.
value
Memory double word logic failure at address, read value
expecting value
Memory odd/even logic failure at address, read value
expecting value
Memory write/read failure at address, read value expecting
value
Memory size in CMOS invalid The amount of memory recorded in the system configuration information does
not match the memory installed in the computer.
No boot device available The computer cannot find the diskette or hard drive.
No boot sector on hard drive The system configuration information in system setup may be incorrect, or the
operating system may be corrupted.
No timer tick interrupt A chip on the system board might be malfunctioning.
Non-system disk or disk error The diskette in drive A or your hard drive does not have a bootable operating
system installed.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-64
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-10: Workstation Error Messages (Cont)

MESSAGE CAUSE

Not a boot diskette There is no operating system on the diskette.


Please connect USB Keyboard/Mouse to USB port(s) on the The USB keyboard and/or mouse must be connected to the USB connectors on
back of the computer. the back of the computer.
Plug and Play Configuration Error The system has encountered a problem in trying to configure one or more
expansion cards.
Read fault Requested sector not found The operating system cannot read from the diskette or hard drive.
The system could not find a particular sector on the disk, or the requested sector
is defective.
Reset failed The disk reset operation failed.
Sector not found The operating system is unable to locate a sector on the diskette or hard drive.
Seek error The operating system is unable to find a specific track on the diskette or hard
drive.
Shutdown failure A chip on the system board might be malfunctioning.
Time-of-day clock stopped The battery may be dead.
Time-of-day not set The time or date displayed in the system configuration information does not
match the system clock.
Timer chip counter 2 failed A chip on the system board might be malfunctioning.
Unexpected interrupt in protected mode The keyboard controller may be malfunctioning, or one or more memory
modules may be loose.
WARNING: Dells Disk Monitoring System has detected that POST has queried the EIDE drive for status information. The drive has indicated
drive [0/1] on the [primary/secondary] EIDE controller is it has detected possible error conditions for its operating specifications.
operating outside of normal specifications. It is advisable to
immediately back up your data and replace your hard drive by
calling your support desk or Dell Computer Corporation.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-65
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-10: Workstation Error Messages (Cont)

MESSAGE CAUSE

Write fault The operating system cannot write to the diskette or hard drive.
Write fault on selected drive

SmartVu Codes

The WorkStation 530 BIOS is also capable of displaying SmartVu error messages. If the BIOS determines that the previous boot
was unsuccessful, it will display an error message similar to the following:
Previous attempts at booting the system have failed at checkpoint ______. For help resolving this problem, please note this
checkpoint and contact by Email: _1HFA_Support_e2@philips.com for technical assistance.

System Beep Codes

When errors occur during a boot routine that cannot be reported on the monitor, the computer may emit a beep code that
identifies the problem.
The beep code is a pattern of sounds: for example, one beep, followed by a second beep, and then a burst of three beeps (code
1-1-3) means that the computer was unable to read the data in nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM).
If the system loses power and beeps constantly when you turn it back on, the BIOS is probably corrupted.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-66
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Dell 650
Front View of Your Computer
The following figures show the controls, lights, and other features on the front panel of your computer. The drive door can open
and fold against the side of the computer. This allows fully unobstructed use of the externally accessible drives.
5-23 5-24

Floppy Drive
ON/OFF
DVD-ROM
Headphone
Microphone
USB

Figure 5-35: Front View of Computer (Doors Closed) Figure 5-36: Front View of Computer (Doors Open)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-67
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Controls and Lights


Power button controls the computer's AC input power Table 5-11.
Power Button F

Table 5-11: Power Button Functions


Power Button Functions
Power Button Function
Computer Status
Off Press and release to turn the computer ON.
Press and hold for more than 6 seconds to immediately turn the computer OFF.
On
NOTE: Use this method only if the computer will not shut down normally.

Power light illuminates in two colors and blinks or remains solid to indicate different states.
Diskette-drive access light illuminates when the drive is reading data from, or writing data to, a diskette. Wait until this
light turns off before you remove a diskette from the drive.
Hard-drive access light illuminates when a hard drive is reading data from, or writing data to, the drive.
Diagnostic lights a series of lights that can help you diagnose a problem with your computer.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-68
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Rear View of Your Computer


Figure 5-37 shows the connectors and other
features on the rear of the Host computer.

COM1
Parallel Port
COM2
Microphone in Audio Line out
Keyboard Mouse
USB I-Box interface

Hospital Network

Monitor 1 - out Monitor 2 - out


Multi-Serial card
CIB Connector
SCSI

1 Gbit/sec LAN - IRS

Figure 5-37: Rear View of the Computer

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-69
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Host Computer Block Diagram


The block diagram in Figure 5-38 displays the host computer and its relationship to other components of the Product Name Long
system.
5-25 5-26

EOD DRIVE
Gantry
IRS I-Box
USB
Monitor SCSI (Cardiac option)
Video
Card Adapter

Keyboard Switch Box SCSI Adapter System


(KVM Switch) Disk
HOST COMPUTER (on board)
Mouse
Multi-Serial
AMC Printer Parallel Card
(option) (on board)
Scan Control
(CT) Box
10/100 LAN
Ethernet Audio
Port
Switch (on board)
(on board)

SDB
1-Gbit LAN
External CIB Card
Card IDE
DICOM
Device

IRS DVD-ROM/ Gantry


Floppy CIB
Computer CD-ROM MCU Video 1 Gbit LAN
Card Card Card
Multi-Serial SCSI I/F
Card Adapter

Figure 5-38: Host Computer Block Diagram Figure 5-39: Host Computer Card Layout

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-70
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

System Board Components

Figure 5-40 shows the principal connectors and components on the system board (refer to Table 5-12).
5-27

Figure 5-40: System Board - connectors and components

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-71
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-12: System Board Components

# DESCRIPTION # DESCRIPTION
1 CD/DVD drive connector (IDE2) 15 Standby power light (AUX_PWR_LED)
PCI card connectors (PCI1, PCI2 [32-bit connectors], PCI3,
2 I/O panel 16
PCI4, and PCI5 [64-bit PCI-X connector])
3 Floppy drive connector (DISKETTE) 17 Telephony connector (MODEM)
memory module connectors (DIMM_1, DIMM_2,
4 18 AGP Pro card connector (AGP)
DIMM_3, DIMM_4)
5 Suspend-to-RAM light (STR_LED) 19 VRM connector (VRM) (for a second microprocessor only)
6 Power connector (POWER 2) 20 Microprocessor and heat-sink connector (CPU_2)
7 Power connector (POWER 1) 21 Front-panel audio connector (FP2AUDIO)
8 Front panel USB/IEEE 1394 connector (USB) 22 Microprocessor and heat-sink connector (CPU_1)
9 Hard-disk connector (IDE1) 23 Microprocessor fan connector (FAN_P1)
10 Real-time clock reset jumper (RTCRST) 24 Microprocessor fan connector (FAN_P0)
11 Card fan connector (FAN) 25 Battery socket (BATTERY)
12 SCSI drive connector (SCSI) 26 Internal speaker (SPKR)
13 Password jumper (PSWD) 27 CD drive audio cable connector (CD_IN)
Auxiliary LED add-in storage adapter connector
14
(AUX_LED)
5-28

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-72
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

System Board Jumpers

Figure 5-41 shows the location of the jumpers on the system board.
Table 5-13 lists the system board jumpers and their settings. To change a jumper setting, pull the plug off its pin(s) and carefully
fit it down onto the pin(s) indicated.
5-29

Table 5-13: System Board Jumper Settings

System-Board Jumper
Setting Description
Settings Jumper

(default)
Password features are
enabled.
PSWD
5-30

Password features are


disabled.
5-31

RTCRST Real-time clock reset.

jumpered unjumpered
Figure 5-41: System Motherboard Jumper Placement

CAUTION
BEFORE CHANGING A JUMPER SETTING, VERIFY THAT THE STANDBY POWER LIGHT ON THE SYSTEM BOARD
HAS TURNED OFF. OTHERWISE, DAMAGE TO YOUR COMPUTER OR UNPREDICTABLE RESULTS MAY OCCUR.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-73
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Connecting Devices
When you connect external devices to your computer's back panel, follow these guidelines:
Check the documentation that accompanied the device for specific installation and configuration instructions.
For example, you must connect most devices to a particular I/O port or connector to operate properly. Also, external
devices like a printer usually require you to load device drivers before they will work.
Always attach external devices while your computer is turned off. Then turn on the computer before turning on any
external devices, unless the documentation for the device specifies otherwise.

CAUTION
BEFORE DISCONNECTING A DEVICE FROM THE COMPUTER, WAIT 10 TO 20
SECONDS AFTER TURNING OFF THE COMPUTER TO AVOID POSSIBLE DAMAGE
TO THE SYSTEM BOARD.

Speaker/Headphone Jack

Used to connect computer speakers, headphones, or other audio output devices. This jack is amplified to support headphones.

Serial Port Connectors

An I/O port on your computer that transfers data sequentially, one bit at a time. Also referred to as a COM port.
Default serial port designations:COM1 (port 1) for the CT Box and COM2 (port 2) for ACQ Diagnostics.

Parallel Port Connector

An I/O port on your computer that transfers data eight bits at a time. It uses a 25-pin, female subminiature-D connector, typically
to connect a non-DICOM printer using the AMC-4 option. Also referred to as an LPT port.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-74
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

USB 2.0 Connector

Used for interface to I-Box card for Cardiac option.

Audio Connectors

The audio controller provides connection to the Gantry via the SDB panel (for AutoVoice).

Mic In Connector

The Mic In connector is used to connect the Dell microphone for voice recording.

PS/2 Mouse Connector

Attach the Logitech PS/2 mouse cable to the 6-pin mouse connector on the rear panel.

NOTE:
This connector is similar to the keyboard connector. Ensure that you correctly identify the
mouse connector before you connect the device.

This connector is similar to the keyboard connector. Ensure that you correctly identify the mouse connector before you connect the
device.
PS/2 Keyboard Connector

Attach the PS/2 keyboard cable to the 6-pin keyboard connector on the rear panel.

NOTE:
This connector is similar to the mouse connector. Ensure that you correctly identify the
keyboard connector before you connect the device.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-75
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Network Adapters

On-board Network Adapter


The on-board network adapter is used to connect the computer to external devices through the Internet such as DICOM devices,
MxView, etc.
A yellow network activity light flashes when the computer is transmitting or receiving network data. (A high volume of
network traffic may make this light appear to be in a steady "ON" state.)
A dual-colored network link and speed light, which is green when a good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network
and the computer, or is orange when a good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. When
the light is off, the computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network.

NOTE:
Do not connect a modem cable to the network adapter. Voltage from telephone communications can damage the network
adapter.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-76
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Troubleshooting the Dell 650


Diagnostic With the Dell ResourceCD

When to Use the Dell Diagnostics


The Dell Diagnostics tests check your computer's hardware without additional equipment and without the risk of destroying data.
When the diagnostics tests complete without indicating any problems, you can have confidence in your computer's operation. If
the tests indicate a problem you cannot solve by yourself, the test results provide important information you will need when
talking to Dell's service and support personnel.

NOTE:
Only use the Dell Diagnostics to test your Dell computer. Using this program with other computers may cause incorrect
computer responses or result in error messages. Also, only use the Dell Diagnostics that came with your computer or an
updated version of the program for your computer. Do not use Dell Diagnostics from another model Dell computer.

Features
The diagnostic test groups features allow you to take the following actions:
Perform quick checks or extensive tests on one or all devices
Choose the number of times a test group or subtest is repeated
Display or print test results or save them in a file
Suspend testing if an error is detected or terminate testing when an adjustable error limit is reached
Access online Help screens that describe the tests and tell how to run them
Read status messages that inform you whether test groups or subtests completed successfully
Receive error messages that appear if problems are detected

Before You Start Testing

Read "Safety FirstFor You and Your Computer" and the safety instructions in your System Information Guide.
Turn on your printer if one is attached, and ensure that it is online.
Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-77
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Dell ResourceCD

Use the Dell ResourceCD to perform hardware diagnostics as follows:


1. While the system is ON, insert the Dell PrecisionTM ResourceCDTM into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Restart the computer.
3. Select "Boot From CD" from the menu.
4. An options menu appears. Option 2 is the only option recommended for use:

Option 2 - Run Dell Diagnostics

Loads the Dell Diagnostics utility that allows you to perform tests and helps determine if your computer has possible
problems. When the Diagnostics menu appears, select one of the options to continue.
1. On the main menu of the Option 2, select 1 Dell 32 bit Diagnostic for Resource CD.
2. The following menu is displayed:
a. Express Test
b. Extended Test
c. Custom Test
d. Symptom Test

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-78
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-14: Dell 650 Tests

OPTION FUNCTION
A quick automatic test of devices. The test takes approximately 20 minutes and requires no interaction
from the operator. Run this test first, to increase the possibility of tracing quickly the problem.
Express Test Test devices are: Real-time clock, system timer, interrupt controller, system memory, I/O APIC,
multi-processor, video card, USB controller, keyboard, serial ports, Intel PRO/1000 NT network, IDE
CD-ROM, audio.
Performs a thorough check of devices. This test typically takes an hour or more, and requires you to
Extended Test
answer questions periodically.
Manual run of specific device/ part of test for a specific device. You can customize the tests in the
Custom Test
parameters page.
Lists the most common symptoms encountered and allow you to select a test, based on the symptom of
Symptom Test
the problem.

3. First, select the Express Test, to perform a fast test on Dell.


4. If any of the devices fail during the test, perform manual test on the same specific device, using the Custom Test option.
If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Test option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for
more information.

Table 5-15: Test Results

TAB FUNCTION
Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered.
Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes and problem description.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-79
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-15: Test Results


Help Test description and may indicate requirements for the selected device.
Displays hardware configuration for the selected device.
The DELL Diagnostic obtains the configuration for all devices from the setup, memory and various internal
Configuration
tests and displays it in the device list, on the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the
names of all the components installed or attached to your computer.
Parameters Allows to customize the test, by changing the test settings.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-80
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Power LED States

The power and hard drive LEDs of the Workstation can display diagnostic LED patterns. These can prove invaluable when
troubleshooting No P.O.S.T. / No Video situations. As always, these are only meant to serve as indicators of potential
issues. Formal and complete troubleshooting should be performed to verify hardware failures.
and Hard Drive

Table 5-16: Power and Hard Drive LEDs

HARD-DRIVE
POWER LIGHT CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
LIGHT
Power is on, and the computer is operating
Solid green N/A No corrective action is required.
normally.
The computer is in the suspended state Press the power button, move the mouse, or press a key
Blinking green Blank
(Windows 2000 and Windows XP). on the keyboard to wake the computer.
Blinks green several Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem
N/A A configuration error exists.
times and then turns off is identified.
The Dell Diagnostics is running a test, or a device If the Dell Diagnostics is running, allow the testing to
Solid yellow N/A on the system board may be faulty or incorrectly complete. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the
installed. specific problem is identified.
A power supply or system board failure has
Blinking yellow Blank Run Diagnostic Resource CD.
occurred.
Blinking yellow Solid green A system board or VRM failure has occurred. Run Diagnostic Resource CD.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-81
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-16: Power and Hard Drive LEDs

HARD-DRIVE
POWER LIGHT CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
LIGHT
Solid green and a beep A problem was detected while the BIOS was See System Beep Codes for instructions on diagnosing
N/A
code during POST executing. the beep code.
Solid green power light The monitor or the graphics card may be faulty or
Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem
and no beep code and N/A incorrectly
is identified.
no video during POST installed.
Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem
Solid green power light
is identified. If the problem is not identified,
and no beep code, but
N/A An integrated system board device may be faulty. contact the CT PMG Haifa Customer Support
the computer locks up
Department:
during POST
Email:_1HFA_Support_e2@philips.com

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-82
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Dell 650 Troubleshooting LEDs

The Dell 650 WorkStation also ships with the Diagnostic LEDs. The four LED's
are labeled "A, B, C, D" and are incorporated on the front I/O panel of the Tesla
chassis (see Figure 5-42). When the computer starts normally, the lights Headphone Output
flash. After the computer starts, the lights remain green. These LEDs serve as
a diagnostic aid for troubleshooting systems exhibiting a No Post, No Video
symptom. Microphone

The four LED's can exist in one of three states: Off, Amber, or Green. The
various combinations of the LED's can be used to diagnose system failures
Table 5-17. If the computer malfunctions, the color and sequence of the lights Secondary USB Ports
identify the problem. However, remember that these codes are only indicators
of system problems. Technicians should troubleshoot an issue to verify the
diagnostic code.
IEEE 1394 Port

Diagnostic LEDs

Figure 5-42: Diagnostic LEDs

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-83
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-17: Diagnostic Light Codes Before POST

LIGHT PATTERN PROBLEM DESCRIPTION SUGGESTED RESOLUTION


No electrical power is supplied Connect the computer to its electrical outlet. Ensure that the front-panel power light is on. If the
to the computer. power light is off, ensure that the computer is connected to a working electrical outlet, and then
press the power button.
If the problem is still not resolved, see table footnote*.

The computer is in a normal off Press the power button to turn the computer on. If the computer does not turn on, ensure that
condition; the computer is the front-
connected to its electrical outlet. panel power light is on. If the power light is off, ensure that the computer is connected to a
working electrical outlet, and then press the power button.
If the problem is still not resolved, contact Technical Support*.
The computer is in a reduced Use one of the appropriate methods to "wake up" the computer. See "Advanced Features" in
power or "sleep" state. your Users Guide.
If the problem is not resolved and you are trying to wake the computer with a USB mouse or
keyboard, substitute the mouse or keyboard with a working PS/2 mouse or keyboard and try
to wake the computer.
If the problem is still not resolved, contact Technical Support*.
The BIOS is not executing. Ensure that the microprocessor is seated correctly and restart the computer.
If the problem is still not resolved, contact Technical Support*.

A possible system board failure Replace computer.


has occurred.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-84
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-17: Diagnostic Light Codes Before POST

LIGHT PATTERN PROBLEM DESCRIPTION SUGGESTED RESOLUTION


A microprocessor and/or VRM Replace computer.
mismatch exists.

A possible VRM 0 failure has Replace computer.


occurred.

A possible VRM 1 failure has Replace computer.


occurred.

* Contact by Email:_1HFA_Support_e2@philips.com for technical assistance.

Table 5-18: Diagnostic Light Codes during POST

LIGHT PATTERN PROBLEM DESCRIPTION SUGGESTED RESOLUTION


A possible BIOS failure has occurred; the Run the BIOS Recovery utility, wait for recovery completion, and then restart the
computer is in the recovery mode. computer.

A possible microprocessor failure has Replace computer.


occurred.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-85
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-18: Diagnostic Light Codes during POST

LIGHT PATTERN PROBLEM DESCRIPTION SUGGESTED RESOLUTION


Memory modules are detected, but a Reset the memory modules to ensure that your computer is successfully
memory failure has occurred. communicating with the memory.
Restart the computer.
If the problem still exists, remove all the memory modules and install one memory
module in memory module connector 4.
If the problem persists, replace computer.:
A possible graphics card failure has Reinstall the graphics card and restart the computer.
occurred. If the problems still exists, replace computer.

A possible floppy or hard drive failure has Check all power and data cable connections, and then restart the computer.
occurred.

System board failure has occurred. Replace computer.

Memory modules are detected, but a Verify that the memory modules that you are installing are compatible with your
memory configuration or compatibility computer.
error exists. Reinstall the memory modules and then restart the computer.
If the problem persists, replace computer.
A possible system board resource and/or Replace computer.
hardware failure has occurred.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-86
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-18: Diagnostic Light Codes during POST

LIGHT PATTERN PROBLEM DESCRIPTION SUGGESTED RESOLUTION


A possible expansion card failure has Determine if a conflict exists by removing a card (not the graphics card) and then
occurred. restarting the computer.
If the problem persists, reinstall the card that you removed, remove a different card,
and then restart the computer.
Repeat this process for each card. If the computer starts normally, troubleshoot the
last card removed from the computer for resource conflicts.
If the problem persists, contact Technical Support*.
The computer is in a normal operating None.
condition after POST.

* For Technical Support, contact by Email:_1HFA_Support_e2@philips.com for technical assistance

System Beep Codes

When errors occur during a boot routine that cannot be reported on the monitor, the computer may emit a beep code that
identifies the problem. In this case, contact by Email:_1HFA_Support_e2@philips.com for technical assistance
1-1-2Microprocessor
CodeCause
1-1-4ROM
1-1-3NVRAM
1-2-1Programmable
1-2-2DMA
1-2-3DMA
1-3Video
1-3-1
3-1-1Slave
3-1-2Master
3-1-3Master
3-1-4Slave
3-2-2Interrupt
3-2-4Keyboard
3-3-1NVRAM
3-3-2NVRAM
3-3-4Video
3-4-1Screen
3-4-2Screen
3-4-3Search
4-2-1No
4-2-2Shutdown
4-2-3Gate
4-2-4Unexpected
4-3-1Memory
4-3-3Timer-chip
4-3-4Time-of-day
4-4-1Serial
4-4-2Failure
4-4-3Math-coprocessor
4-4-4Cache
through
time
Memory
A20
BIOS
initialization
page
DMA
interrupt
Memory
or
test
initialization
retrace
for
DMA
interrupt
to
tick
failure
configuration
power
2-4-4DIMMs
parallel
failure
vector
Controller
decompress
failure
video
failure
register
counter
checksum
register
interrupt
clock
Test
register
failure
Test
interval
register
loss
mask
above
loading
ROM
mask
port
failure
stopped
test
failure
read/write
2failure
failure
failure
Test
failure
register
failure
in
test
not
address
failure
code
register
timer
failure
failure
protected
failure
being
failure
to shadowed
failure
0FFFFh
failure
properly
mode memory
identified or used

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-87
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Expansion Cards
1-Gbit/sec Network LAN AdapterIntel PRO/1000

The 1-Gbit/sec network LAN adapter is used to connect the HOST computer, using TCP/IP protocol, to the IRS for transfer of
images, log file (BugReps), etc.
Intel_ 82543GC Gigabit Controller
10/100/1000 Mbps

CIB Adapter

A serial 9-pin male adapter for CANpro connection.


The CIB is the interface of the Host computer to the Gantry via the CAN bus.
The CAN interface supports data transfer rates of up to 100 KB/second. A read buffer on the board stores up to 1,000 CAN
telegrams for the ICS.
The CAN controller is an active card. An interrupt is asserted to the PCI bus, when a telegram is stored in the Read Buffer.

Multi-Serial Card

The PCI Multi-Serial card provides eight asynchronous high speed Serial Ports with data transmission rates of up to 115 K baud.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-88
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Adaptec SCSI 29160 card

This 64-bit PCI-to-SCSI adapter performs at up to 160 MB/second and allows for the connection of fifteen SCSI devices. It
provides an internal/ external 68-pin LVD/ Ultra Wide SCSI connector and internal 50-pin Ultra SCSI connector.
Highlights
160 MByte/sec performance
SpeedFlex technology ensures top performance of all connected devices, regardless of
SCSI generation
Seamless backwards compatibility protects legacy devices
Industry-leading compatibility, reliability
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Checking) improves data integrity, by checking all
transferred data
Domain Validation intelligently verifies system configuration for improved reliability
Enables up to 12 meter cable-lengths for maximum configuration flexibility data integrity Figure 5-43: Adaptec SCSI

nVIDIA Quadro4 980XGL

The nVIDIA video card incorporates dual programmable vertex shaders, faster pixel shaders
and 3D textures, giving developers the freedom to program a virtually infinite number of custom
special effects to create true-to-life characters and environments.
The nVIDIA video card effectively multiplies the memory bandwidth to ensure fluid frame rates
for the latest 3D and 2D applications.
The nView hardware and software technology combination, delivers maximum flexibility for
multi-display options, and provides unprecedented end-user control of the desktop experience.
The nVIDIA display card supports up-to two monitors.
Figure 5-44: nVIDEA Quadro4
Video Card

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-89
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Host Computer Parts Replacement

Overview
The Host Computer has the following FRUs (Field Replaceable Units):
1. Expansion Cards (Installing and Removing Expansion Cards)
2. Hard Disk (Replacing the Hard Disk)
3. Memory Upgrade (Host Computer Memory Upgrade (for Dell 530 only)

Computer Safety
Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer system from potential damage and to ensure your own
personal safety.

CAUTION
TO ENSURE SAFETY, TURN OFF THE UPS (INSIDE THE PDC) BY PRESSING THE ON /
OFF PUSH BUTTON AND DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE (FROM THE PDC)
FROM THE RACK COMPUTER.

When Working Inside Your Computer


Before you open the computer cover, perform the following steps in the sequence indicated.

NOTE:

Do not attempt to service the computer yourself, except as explained in this Service
Manual. Always follow installation and service instructions closely.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-90
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

CAUTION
THERE IS A DANGER OF A NEW BATTERY EXPLODING IF IT IS INCORRECTLY
INSTALLED. REPLACE THE BATTERY ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE
RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISCARD USED BATTERIES ACCORDING
TO MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS.

1. Turn off the computer and any peripherals.


Disconnect your computer and devices from their power sources. Also, disconnect any telephone or network lines from
the computer. Doing so reduces the potential for personal injury or shock.
2. Wear a wrist grounding strap, and clip it to an unpainted metal surface, such as the padlock loop on the back of the chassis
(see Figure 5-25). If a wrist grounding strap is not available, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on
the chassis, such as the power supply, to discharge any static charge from your body before touching anything inside your
computer.
While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis to dissipate any static electricity
that might harm internal components. Also avoid touching components or contacts on a card and avoid touching pins on
a chip.
3. Disconnect your computer and peripherals from their power sources.
Before disconnecting a peripheral device from the computer, wait 10 to 20 seconds after disconnecting the computer from
its electrical outlet. Before removing a component from the system board, verify that the standby power light on the
system board has turned off. To locate this light, see "System Board Components" or "Interior Service Label" in the Dell
Service Manual.
In addition, take note of these safety guidelines when appropriate:
When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain- relief loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have
a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before disconnecting
the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you
connect a cable, make sure both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned.
Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges
or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a microprocessor chip by its edges, not by its pins.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-91
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge


Static electricity can harm delicate components inside your computer. To prevent static damage, discharge static electricity from
your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components, such as the microprocessor. You can do so by
touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
As you continue to work inside the computer, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to remove any static charge your
body may have accumulated.
You can also take the following steps to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD):
When unpacking a static-sensitive component from its shipping carton, do not remove the component from the antistatic
packing material until you are ready to install the component in your computer. Just before unwrapping the antistatic
packaging, be sure to discharge static electricity from your body.
When transporting a sensitive component, first place it in an antistatic container or packaging.
Handle all sensitive components in a static-safe area. If possible, use antistatic floor pads and workbench pads.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-92
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Logout and Shutdown Procedure


When performing parts replacement on the Host computer, log OFF from the Host and IRS computers and shutdown the power
as follows:

Host Computer
1. Open the Archive Manager.
2. Click File | Logout.
3. From the Logout window, click Shut Down, select Shut Down and click OK.
4. Press Ctrl twice to switch to the IRS computer.

IRS Computer
1. Close Master.exe.
2. Select Start | Shut Down and click OK.

Turn OFF Power


1. Turn OFF the ON/OFF switch on the Computer Rack door.
2. Turn OFF the output power from the UPS by pressing on OFF pushbutton.
3. Turn OFF the on-site power switch.

WARNING
BEFORE YOU BEGIN ANY OF THE PROCEDURES IN THIS SECTION, FOLLOW THE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SAFETY
CHAPTER OF THE SERVICE MANUAL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-93
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

WARNING
TO GUARD AGAINST ELECTRICAL SHOCK, ALWAYS UNPLUG YOUR COMPUTER FROM THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET BEFORE
OPENING THE COVER.
BEFORE REMOVING A COMPONENT FROM THE SYSTEM BOARD, VERIFY THAT THE STANDBY POWER LIGHT ON THE
SYSTEM BOARD HAS TURNED OFF.

Login and Startup Procedure


Perform this procedure when restarting the system after replacing any part.
1. Turn ON the on-site power switch.
2. Turn ON the UPS using the ON push button.
3. Turn ON the STBY/ON switch on the Scan Control Box.
4. Turn ON the IRS from the ON/OFF switch and wait until the Master.exe starts up.
5. Press <Ctrl> twice to switch to the Host computer.
6. Turn ON the Host.
7. Log in as mxservice (password service_only).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-94
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Opening the Computer Cover

CAUTION
BEFORE YOU PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE, SEE SECTION Safety .
WHEN UNPACKING A STATIC-SENSITIVE COMPONENT FROM ITS SHIPPING CARTON,
DO NOT REMOVE THE COMPONENT FROM THE ANTISTATIC PACKING MATERIAL
UNTIL YOU ARE READY TO INSTALL THE COMPONENT IN YOUR COMPUTER. JUST
BEFORE UNWRAPPING THE ANTISTATIC PACKAGING, BE SURE TO DISCHARGE
STATIC ELECTRICITY FROM YOUR BODY.
WHEN TRANSPORTING A SENSITIVE COMPONENT, FIRST PLACE IT IN AN
ANTISTATIC CONTAINER OR PACKAGING.
HANDLE ALL SENSITIVE COMPONENTS IN A STATIC-SAFE AREA. IF POSSIBLE, USE
ANTISTATIC FLOOR PADS AND WORKBENCH PADS.

WARNING
ELECTRICAL HAZARD! BEFORE DISCONNECTING A DEVICE FROM THE COMPUTER, WAIT 10 TO 20 SECONDS AFTER
DISCONNECTING THE COMPUTER FROM ITS ELECTRICAL OUTLET AND VERIFY THAT THE STANDBY POWER LIGHT ON THE
SYSTEM BOARD HAS TURNED OFF.

NOTE:
Ensure that sufficient space exists to accommodate the open coverat least 30 cm (1 ft) of desk top space.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-95
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

1. Turn off the computer and devices, disconnect


5-32

them from their electrical outlets, and wait 10 to


20 seconds.
If you have installed a padlock through the
padlock ring on the back panel, remove the
padlock.
2. Lay the computer on its right side and open the
computer cover:
a. Slide the cover release latch toward the top of
the computer (see Figure 5-45).
b. Raise the back of the cover, and pivot it
toward the front of the computer.
While you work, periodically touch any unpainted metal
surface on the computer to dissipate any static electricity
that could harm internal components.

Figure 5-45: Opening the Cover

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-96
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Closing the Computer Cover


5-33

CAUTION
YOU MUST FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS REGARDING ESD ANTI-STATIC PROTECTION
WHEN PERFORMING ANY PROCEDURE INSIDE THE COMPUTER. FAILURE TO DO SO
CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO COMPUTER COMPONENTS AND POSSIBLE LOSS
OF DATA. REFER TO THE SYSTEMS SERVICE MANUAL.
5-34

CAUTION
A LOOSELY CONNECTED SCSI CABLE CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO COMPUTER
COMPONENTS WHEN CLOSING THE COMPUTER COVER.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-97
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Overview
A loose SCSI cable may cause a connector to be jammed under the housing and thereby damage computer components.

Housing for EOD,


Procedure CD-RW and DVD-ROM

When the SCSI cable


CAUTION is connected to the
hard disk by the first
ENSURE THAT ALL CABLES ARE CONNECTED
connector on the
AND FOLDED OUT OF THE WAY.
cable, it may become
ENSURE THAT NO TOOLS OR EXTRA PARTS ARE
too loose.
LEFT INSIDE THE COMPUTER.

1. Route the SCSI cable under the power cable


harness (Figure 5-150) and connect the SCSI
cable to the hard disk using the second or third A loose cable may
connectors of the SCSI cable (Figure 5-48), cause a SCSI
instead of the first connector. connector and board
In the example in Figure 5-47, the SCSI cable is components to be
routed under the power cable harness and damaged by the
connected to the hard disks by the second and housing.
third connectors on the SCSI cable. Routing the Figure 5-46: Loose SCSI cable
cable in this way will avoid jamming the SCSI
cable and/or connector under the housing when
closing the cover.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-98
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5-35 5-36

In this case, the hard


disks are connected
to the second and
third connectors on
the SCSI making it
tight.

Third
connector
Power cable harness
Second
connector

Figure 5-47: Properly Routed SCSI Cable Figure 5-48: SCSI Connectors

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-99
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

2. Close the computer cover (see Figure 5-49:.


a. Pivot the cover down and into position.
b. If your computer has a baffle, ensure that the
baffle is correctly positioned by guiding it into
place as you lower the cover.
c. Press down on the cover to close it.
d. Once the cover is closed, slide the release latch
to the right until the latch clicks into place. (1) cover
release latch
(2) security

Figure 5-49: Closing the Computer

Replacing the Host Computer


The Dell Precision 650 workstation is supplied as a field replacement unit with the following components:

Dell Computer (650)


CPU 3.06 GHz
Hard Disk 146 GB 10K RPM
3.5" Floppy Drive
Keyboard
Mouse
RAM: 2GB
DVD-ROM
Video card

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-100
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Upon receipt of the Dell 650 computer you must modify it to conform to the nominal system for the Brilliance CT system
configuration (see Figure 5-50).
Perform the following procedure to remove the necessary
components that must be transferred from the old computer to
the new one.
1. Follow ESD Anti-Static safety procedures See Section
Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge.
2. Power OFF the old computer and disconnect all cables.
3. Open the old computer and remove the following:
a. 1-Gbit LAN card See Section Replacing the 1-Gbit
LAN Card
b. Multi serial Card See Section Replacing the
Multi-Serial Card
c. CIB card See Section Replacing the CIB Card
d. SCSI I/F card See Section Replacing the SCSI I/F
Card
4. Make sure to insert the cards in the proper slots in the
new computer (see Figure 5-50). Video CIB 1 Gbit LAN
5. Open the new computer (see Opening the Computer Card Card Card
Cover ).
Multi-Serial SCSI I/F
6. Install the CIB card. Card Adapter
7. Install the Multi Serial card
(see Replacing the Multi-Serial Card ). Figure 5-50: DELL 650 Slots
8. Install the 1-Gbit/sec LAN card (see Replacing the 1-Gbit
LAN Card ).
9. Install the SCSI I/F card (see Replacing the SCSI I/F Card ).
10. Close the computer (see Closing the Computer Cover ).
11. Connect all cables and boot up the computer.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-101
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

12. Install the existing software version.

Installing and Removing Expansion Cards


The Host computer provides expansion slots for the following cards:
Up to three 32-bit, 33-MHz PCI cards
Up to two 64-bit, 66-MHz PCI expansion cards

System Board Expansion Card Components

NOTE:

Install only 66-MHz expansion cards in the 66-MHz


slots. You can install 33-MHz cards in the 66-MHz
slots. However, the entire bus, including the
integrated SCSI controller, will operate at only
33 MHz.

Figure 5-51:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-102
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Installing an Expansion Card

CAUTION
BEFORE YOU PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE, SEE SECTION Safety .

WARNING
ELECTRICAL HAZARD! BEFORE DISCONNECTING A DEVICE FROM THE COMPUTER, WAIT 10 TO 20 SECONDS AFTER
DISCONNECTING THE COMPUTER FROM ITS ELECTRICAL OUTLET AND VERIFY THAT THE STANDBY POWER LIGHT ON THE
SYSTEM BOARD HAS TURNED OFF.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-103
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Install an expansion card as follows:


1. Open the computer cover.
2. Press the lever on the expansion card retention
arm and raise the retention arm (see Figure
5-52).
3. If you are installing a new expansion card,
remove the filler bracket for an empty card-slot
opening. Then continue with step 5.
4. If you are replacing an expansion card that is
already installed in the computer, remove the
expansion card. If necessary, disconnect any
cables connected to the card. Grasp the card by
its top corners, and ease it out of its connector.
5. Prepare the new expansion card for installation.

See the documentation that came with the expansion


card for information on configuring the card, making
internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your
computer.
Figure 5-52: Raising the Expansion Card Retention Arm

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-104
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

6. Insert the expansion card into the expansion-card


connector.
7. If the expansion card is full-length, insert the end
of the card into the expansion-card guide bracket
as you lower the card toward its connector on the
system board. Insert the card firmly into the
expansion-card connector on the system board
(see Figure 5-53).
8. Lower the expansion card retention arm and
press it into place, securing the expansion card(s)
in the chassis.
9. Connect any cables that should be attached to
the card.
See the documentation for the card for
information about the card's cable connections.

NOTE:

Do not route expansion card cables over or behind


the expansion cards. Cables routed over the
expansion cards can prevent the computer cover from
Figure 5-53: Installing an Expansion Card
closing properly or cause damage to the equipment.
Cables routed toward the rear of the expansion cards
can prevent proper airflow from the expansion-
card-cooling fan

10. Close the computer cover (see Closing the Computer Cover).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-105
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Removing an Expansion Card

CAUTION
BEFORE YOU PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE, SEE SECTION Safety .

WARNING
ELECTRICAL HAZARD! BEFORE DISCONNECTING A DEVICE FROM THE COMPUTER, WAIT 10 TO 20 SECONDS AFTER
DISCONNECTING THE COMPUTER FROM ITS ELECTRICAL OUTLET AND VERIFY THAT THE STANDBY POWER LIGHT ON THE
SYSTEM BOARD HAS TURNED OFF.

1. Press the lever on the expansion card retention arm and raise the retention arm (see Figure 5-52).
2. If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card.
3. Grasp the card by its top corners, and ease it out of its connector.
4. If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot opening.

NOTE:

Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to maintain FCC
certification of the computer. The brackets also keep dust and dirt out of your computer.

5. Lower the expansion card retention arm and press it into place, securing the expansion card(s) in the chassis.
6. Close the computer cover.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-106
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

WARNING
FOLLOW ALL SAFETY GUIDELINES BEFORE YOU REPLACE ANY OF THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS.

Carefully read and follow the instructions for opening and closing the Host computer.

Replacing the 1-Gbit LAN Card


Replace the 1-Gbit LAN card as follows (see Installing and Removing Expansion Cards and Figure 5-29 on page 3-47):
1. Disconnect the network cable from the Host computer (see Figure 5-27 on page 3-43).
2. Remove the LAN card.
3. Insert the new LAN card.
4. Connect the network cable to the new card.

Replacing the Multi-Serial Card


Replace the Multi-Serial card as follows (see Installing and Removing Expansion Cards and Figure 5-29 on page 3-47):
1. Disconnect the external multi-serial cable.
2. Remove the Multi-Serial card.
3. Insert the new Multi-Serial card.
4. Connect the multi-serial cable to the new card.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-107
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Replacing the CIB Card


Replace the CIB card as follows (see Installing and Removing Expansion Cards and Figure 5-29 on page 3-47):
1. Disconnect the external CIB cable.
2. Disconnect the power connector from the CIB card.
3. Remove the CIB card.
4. Insert the new CIB card.
5. Connect the power connector to the new card.
6. Connect the external CIB cable.

Replacing the SCSI I/F Card


Replace the SCSI I/F card as follows (see Installing and Removing Expansion Cards and Figure 5-29 on page 3-47):
1. Disconnect the external SCSI cable.
2. Disconnect the internal led cable.
3. Remove the SCSI I/F card.
4. Insert the new SCSI I/F card.
5. Connect the internal led cable.
6. Connect the external SCSI cable.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-108
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Replacing the Hard Disk

Replace the hard disk as follows:


1. Disconnect the DC power cable and interface cable from the
back of the drive you are replacing.
2. Remove the drive from the chassis drive bay.
3. Squeeze together the tabs at each side of the drive to
disengage the drive bracket from the chassis.
4. Slide the drive bracket upward, and remove it from the chassis
(see Figure 5-54).

Figure 5-54: Removing the Hard Disk

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-109
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Removing a Hard Disk

1. Unpack the replacement disk and prepare it for installation.

NOTE:
Ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on the back of the computer.

Check the documentation with the Disk to verify that the


Disk is configured for your computer. Change any
settings necessary for your configuration.

Attaching Bracket Rails for a Hard Disk

If the replacement Disk does not have bracket rails


attached, remove the rails from the old Disk by removing
the four screws that secure the rails to the Disk. Then
attach the bracket rails to the replacement Disk (see
Figure 5-55).

Figure 5-55: Attaching Bracket Rails

NOTE:
If you are not replacing an existing Disk and the new Disk does not have bracket rails attached,
install the extra rail set that is located inside your computer in an empty Disk bay.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-110
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Installing a Hard Disk


5-37

2. Slide the Disk/bracket assembly into the Disk bay until both Disk bracket tabs
snap securely into place (see Figure 5-56).
3. Connect the cables to the Disk:
a. Connect a DC power cable to the power input connector on the back of the
Disk.
b. Connect the appropriate interface cable to the interface connector on the
back of the Disk.
c. Ensure that all cables are firmly connected. Fold cables out of the way to
provide airflow for the fan and cooling vents.
4. Verify the configuration of the hard disk as follows:
a. Switch ON the Host computer.
b. Immediately during the boot sequence press F2 to display the BIOS
configuration screen.
c. In the BIOS screen, select the Boot tab and then Hard Drive. Verify that the
devices are listed in the following sequence:
Figure 5-56: Inserting a Hard Disk
5-39
5-38

-Hard Drive
#1 ST340016A-(PM)
Bootable Add -In Card s
#3 PCI RAID Adap ter-(bus 03 dev 00)

Where ST340016A-(PM) must be number one, and PCI RAID Adapter-(bus 03 dev 00) must be number two or three.
If the sequence is not as displayed above, change the sequence using the commands described in the BIOS configuration
screen.

5. Install the existing software version.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-111
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Second 3.06GHz Microprocessor Replacement


Overview

The Dell computer is designed for dual-processor operations. The heat sinks (CPU_0 and CPU_1) are keyed to fit their specific
connector.
For dual-processor operations, both processor sockets and the VRM connector must be populated.
If the processors do not match, you receive a system message. If the processors voltage do not match or the VRM is not properly
installed, the diagnostic lights indicate an error.

Parts

The second 3.06 GHz Microprocessor kit contains the following:


5-40

Module
Retention
Clips

Heat Sink Microprocessor VRM

Figure 5-57:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-112
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Pre-installation

Before continuing with the CPU installation procedure check the


5-41

computer CPU cache as follows:


1. Restart the Host computer.
2. During the restart press F2.
3. In the BIOS setup screen, note the L2 cache size (see
Figure 5-58). Write down the cache size.
4. Verify that on the CPU kit, the label lists the cache size as the
same as the Host CPU you have just checked in the Host
BIOS Setup.
5. If the cache size is not the same, do not continue with the
upgrade procedure. Order a new CPU that complies with the
one in the computer.
6. If the cache is the same continue with the upgrade
procedure.

Figure 5-58: Host BIOS Setup; L2 Cache Size

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-113
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Replacement and Installation

This section describes the replacement and installation procedure for the second 3.06 GHz CPU option for the Dell 650
computer.
WARNING BEFORE YOU BEGIN ANY OF THE PROCEDURES IN THIS SECTION, FOLLOW THE
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SAFETY CHAPTER OF THIS SERVICE MANUAL.
WARNING BEFORE DISCONNECTING A DEVICE FROM THE COMPUTER, WAIT 10 TO 20
SECONDS AFTER DISCONNECTING THE COMPUTER FROM ITS ELECTRICAL
OUTLET. BEFORE REMOVING A COMPONENT FROM THE SYSTEM BOARD, VERIFY
THAT THE STANDBY POWER LIGHT ON THE SYSTEM BOARD HAS TURNED OFF.
TO LOCATE THIS LIGHT, SEE THE INTERIOR SERVICE LABEL.
YOU MUST FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS REGARDING ESD PROTECTION WHEN PERFORMING ANY PROCEDURE INSIDE THE
COMPUTER. FAILURE TO DO SO CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO COMPUTER COMPONENTS AND POSSIBLE LOSS OF
DATA.
When unpacking a static-sensitive component from its shipping carton, do not remove the component
from the antistatic packing material until you are ready to install the component in your computer. Just
before unwrapping the antistatic packaging, be sure to discharge static electricity from your body.
When transporting a sensitive component, first place it in an antistatic container or packaging.
Handle all sensitive components in a static-safe area. If possible, use antistatic floor pads and workbench
pads.

NOTE:
Ensure that sufficient space exists to accommodate the open coverat least 30 cm (1 ft) of desk top space.

Removing the Airflow Shroud


1. Shut down the computer.
2. Open the computer (see Opening the Computer Cover ).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-114
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

3. Press down and back on the indentations at the top corners


of the shroud.
4. The top anchor tabs disengage from the anchor slots.
5. Lift the airflow shroud out of the computer (see Figure 5-59).
(1) airflow shroud
(2) indentations x2
(3) bottom anchor tabs x2
(4) side anchor tabs x2
(5) top anchor tabs x2

Figure 5-59: Airflow Shroud Removal

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-115
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Releasing the Fan


1. Release the microprocessor fan located adjacent to the slot for the second microprocessor by pressing down on the black
tab at the top of the fan (see Figure 5-60).
2. Position the fan on the heat sink to allow unrestricted installation of the second microprocessor and VRM (see
Figure 5-61).
5-42 5-43

Black Tab

Figure 5-60: Figure 5-61:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-116
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Inserting the New CPU

CAUTION
POSITION THE CPU CORRECTLY IN THE SOCKET TO AVOID PERMANENT DAMAGE TO
THE CPU AND THE COMPUTER.

1. Remove the new CPU from the antistatic envelope.


2. If the release lever is not extended to the release position, move it to that position (see Figure 5-62).
3. Align pin-1 (the imprinted corner) of the CPU (see Figure 5-63) and pin-1 of the socket (see Figure 5-62).
5-44 5-45

Release Lever
Pin 1 on CPU

Pin 1 on Socket

Figure 5-62: CPU socket with Release Lever Extended Figure 5-63: CPU on pin side

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-117
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

CAUTION
CPU PINS ARE DELICATE. TO AVOID DAMAGE, ENSURE THAT THE CPU ALIGNS
EXACTLY WITH THE SOCKET. DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN YOU INSTALL
THE PROCESSOR.

4. Carefully set the CPU in the socket and press it down lightly
5-46

(see Figure 5-64).


5. Rotate the release lever down until it snaps into place, securing
the CPU.

Figure 5-64: CPU Release Lever

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-118
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Inserting the VRM


Adjacent to the new CPU is the VRM slot (see Figure 5-65). The VRM (Voltage Regulator Module) regulates the voltage fed to
the CPU.
1. Align the notch on the bottom of the VRM with the ridges inside the slot (see Figure 5-66).
2. Press the VRM straight down into the slot until the securing clips snap into place at the ends of the module.
5-47 5-48

Figure 5-66: VRM Slot

Figure 5-65: VRM Location

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-119
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Installing the Heat Sink and Retention Module Clips


5-50

1. Remove the heat sink protective cover


(see Figure 5-67) (if it is a new heat sink) and place the heat
sink in the base.
5-49

Figure 5-67: Heat Sink

2. Place one end of the heat sink under the tab on the retention 1. retention module clips (2)
module on the side opposite the lever. Lower the heat sink
2. tabs (2 on each retention module
onto the CPU so that the heat sink fits securely under the tab
clip)
on the other end of the retention module.
3. heat sink
3. Insert the retention module clips.
4. microprocessor socket
4. Insert the bottom anchor tabs into the anchor slots.
5. retention module
5. Align and insert the side anchor tabs into the anchor slots.
6. Press the indentations until the top anchor tabs on the shroud Figure 5-68: Heat Sink Installation
snap securely into place.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-120
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Replacing the Fan and the Airflow Shroud


1. Replace the CPU fan: insert the bottom of the fan into its place.
a. Pressing down on the black tab at the top of the fan (see Figure 5-59).
b. Insert the top of the CPU fan.
c. Release the black tab to lock the CPU fan in place.
2. Replace the Airflow Shroud:
a. Press down and forward on the indentations at the top corners of the shroud.
b. Insert the anchor tabs into the anchor slots.
3. Close the computer (see Closing the Computer Cover ).

Check CPU Installation

1. Connect all cables and turn ON the computer.


5-51

2. During startup the message Press F2 appears for about three


seconds. Press F2 and wait for the BIOS setup menu to open.
3. In the BIOS setup menu, scroll down to CPU Information and press
Enter.
4. Verify that Hyper-Threading is Disabled (see Figure 5-69).
Perform the following procedure to Disable the Hyper-Threading:
a. With the keyboard arrow keys, scroll the BIOS selection to
highlight Hyper-Threading (see Figure 5-69).
b. Press ENTER. With the keyboard arrow keys, scroll to
Disabled.
c. Press ENTER. The Hyper-Threading is Disabled.
Figure 5-69: CPU Information

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-121
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5-52

5-54

5. Verify the CPU settings (see Figure 5-70):


Processor 0 and Processor 1 are
identified
The L2 Cache sizes are the same for
the two processors
6. Press Esc twice to exit BIOS setup.
5-53

Cache size

Cache size

Figure 5-70: CPU Information

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-122
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Host Computer Memory Upgrade (for Dell 530 only)


Memory Components
The following figures will help you identify memory modules and components.

5-55 5-56

Figure 5-71: Memory Module Label Figure 5-72: System Board Memory Components

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-123
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5-57

Figure 5-73: Memory Riser Board Components

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-124
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Riser Board Installation


When installing memory modules using the optional memory riser boards, observe the following guidelines:

The memory riser boards must be installed in system board memory sockets 1 and 2. Memory riser board A must be
installed in system board memory socket 1, and riser board B must be installed in system board socket 2. System board
memory sockets 3 and 4 can either be empty or contain CRIMMs (dummy memory boardsboards without memory on
them). Sockets 3 and 4 cannot contain RIMMs (memory boards) with memory riser boards installed in sockets 1 and
2. See Figure 5-72 to identify the system board sockets.
Memory sockets on the riser boards must be upgraded in matched pairs. In other words, two sockets in a pair must
contain modules of identical capacity, number of components, and speed. See Figure 5-73 to identify pairs of sockets.
Not all memory sockets on the memory riser boards need to be populated: if one or more pairs of memory sockets contain
RIMMs, then the next pair must contain CRIMMs, and the remaining pair(s) can be empty. For example, if the first and
second pairs of memory sockets on the riser boards contain RIMMs, then the third pair must contain CRIMMs, and the
fourth pair can remain empty.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-125
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Sample Configurations

Table 5-19: Sample Configurations without Memory Riser Boards

TOTAL MEMORY SOCKET 1 SOCKET 2 SOCKET 3 SOCKET 4

128 MB 64 MB 64 MB CRIMM CRIMM

256 MB 64 MB 64 MB 64 MB 64 MB

256 MB 128 MB 128 MB CRIMM CRIMM

384 MB 128 MB 128 MB 64 MB 64 MB

512 MB 128 MB 128 MB 128 MB 128 MB

512 MB 256 MB 256 MB CRIMM CRIMM

640 MB 256 MB 256 MB 64 MB 64 MB

768 MB 256 MB 256 MB 128 MB 128 MB

1024 MB 256 MB 256 MB 256 MB 256 MB

1024 MB 512 MB 512 MB CRIMM CRIMM

1152 MB 512 MB 512 MB 64 MB 64 MB

1280 MB 512 MB 512 MB 128 MB 128 MB

1536 MB 512 MB 512 MB 256 MB 256 MB

2048 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-126
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-20: Sample Configurations with Memory Riser Boards

RISER BOARD A RISER BOARD B

TOTAL MEMORY SOCKET 1 SOCKET 2 SOCKET 3 SOCKET 4 SOCKET 1 SOCKET 2 SOCKET 3 SOCKET 4

128 MB 64 MB CRIMM empty empty 64 MB CRIMM empty empty

256 MB 64 MB 64 MB CRIMM empty 64 MB 64 MB CRIMM empty

384 MB 64 MB 64 MB 64 MB CRIMM 64 MB 64 MB 64 MB CRIMM

512 MB 64 MB 64 MB 64 MB 64 MB 64 MB 64 MB 64 MB 64 MB

256 MB 128 MB CRIMM empty empty 128 MB CRIMM empty empty

512 MB 128 MB 128 MB CRIMM empty 128 MB 128 MB CRIMM empty

768 MB 128 MB 128 MB 64 MB 64 MB 128 MB 128 MB 64 MB 64 MB

1024 MB 128 MB 128 MB 128 MB 128 MB 128 MB 128 MB 128 MB 128 MB

512 MB 256 MB CRIMM empty empty 256 MB CRIMM empty empty

1024 MB 256 MB 256 MB CRIMM empty 256 MB 256 MB CRIMM empty

1280 MB 256 MB 256 MB 64 MB 64 MB 256 MB 256 MB 64 MB 64 MB

1536 MB 256 MB 256 MB 128 MB 128 MB 256 MB 256 MB 128 MB 128 MB

2048 MB 256 MB 256 MB 256 MB 256 MB 256 MB 256 MB 256 MB 256 MB

1024 MB 512 MB CRIMM empty empty 512 MB CRIMM empty empty

2048 MB 512 MB 512 MB CRIMM empty 512 MB 512 MB CRIMM empty

2304 MB 512 MB 512 MB 64 MB 64 MB 512 MB 512 MB 64 MB 64 MB

2560 MB 512 MB 512 MB 128 MB 128 MB 512 MB 512 MB 128 MB 128 MB

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-127
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-20: Sample Configurations with Memory Riser Boards

RISER BOARD A RISER BOARD B

TOTAL MEMORY SOCKET 1 SOCKET 2 SOCKET 3 SOCKET 4 SOCKET 1 SOCKET 2 SOCKET 3 SOCKET 4

3072 MB 512 MB 512 MB 256 MB 256 MB 512 MB 512 MB 256 MB 256 MB

4096 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-128
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Upgrading System Memory

WARNING
MEMORY MODULES CAN GET VERY HOT DURING NORMAL OPERATION. BE SURE THAT THE MEMORY MODULES HAVE
HAD SUFFICIENT TIME TO COOL BEFORE YOU TOUCH THEM.

CAUTION
YOU MUST FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS REGARDING ESD PROTECTION WHEN
PERFORMING ANY PROCEDURE INSIDE THE COMPUTER. FAILURE TO DO SO
CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO COMPUTER COMPONENTS AND POSSIBLE
LOSS OF DATA.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-129
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

WARNING
ELECTRICAL HAZARD! BEFORE DISCONNECTING A DEVICE FROM THE COMPUTER, WAIT 10 TO 20 SECONDS AFTER
DISCONNECTING THE COMPUTER FROM ITS ELECTRICAL OUTLET AND VERIFY THAT THE STANDBY POWER LIGHT ON THE
SYSTEM BOARD HAS TURNED OFF.

1. Turn off the computer and devices, disconnect


5-58

them from their electrical outlets, and wait 10 to


20 seconds.
2. Lay the computer on its right side.
3. Open the computer cover:
a. Slide the cover release latch toward the top of
the computer (see (see Figure 5-74)).
b. Raise the back of the cover, and pivot it
toward the front of the computer.

Figure 5-74: Opening the Computer Cover

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-130
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

4. To access system board memory


5-59

sockets, remove the microprocessor


airflow shroud as follows:
a. Press down and back on the
indentations at the top corners of
the shroud.
b. The top anchor tabs will disengage
from the chassis anchor slots (see
(see Figure 5-75)).
c. Lift the airflow shroud out of the
chassis.
5. If necessary, remove memory modules
that occupy system board sockets in
which you plan to install upgrade
modules (see Section , Removing a
Memory Module ).
6. If you have the optional memory riser
boards installed and you plan to install
upgrade modules on the riser boards,
remove the riser boards (see Section ,
Removing Memory Riser Boards ).
7. Install the upgrade modules in system
board or riser board sockets (see
Section , Installing a Memory Module ).
Figure 5-75: Removing the Microprocessor Airflow Shroud

8. If you install the memory riser boards, see Section , Installing Memory Riser Boards .
9. Install the airflow shroud:
a. Insert the bottom anchor tabs of the shroud into the chassis anchor slots.
b. Press the shroud toward the chassis until the top anchor tabs on the shroud snap securely into place

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-131
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

10. Close the computer cover (Closing the Computer Cover).


11. Stand the computer upright.
12. Reconnect the computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on.

NOTE:

If enabled, the Chassis Intrusion option causes the following message to be displayed at the
next system start-up:
ALERT! Cover was previously removed.

If the computer detects that the new memory does not match the existing system configuration information, it generates the
following message:

The amount of system memory has changed.


Adaptec SCSI BIOS V3.10
2001 Adaptec, Inc.
Press <Ctrl><A> for SCSISelect(TM) Utility!
Strike the F1 key to continue, F2 to run the setup utility

13. Enter system setup (press F2), and check the value for System Memory. The computer should have already changed
the value of System Memory to reflect the newly installed memory. If the new total is correct (2048/4096 MB), skip to
Step 15.
14. If the memory total is incorrect, repeat the entire procedure from the beginning.
Refer to Section , Troubleshooting the Dell 530 if the error message persists.
15. Exit system setup, and wait until the Ctrl+Alt+DEL message appears.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-132
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Removing a Memory Module

CAUTION
TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE MEMORY RISER BOARD, PRESS THE RISER BOARD
STRAIGHT DOWN INTO THE SOCKET WITH EQUAL FORCE APPLIED AT EACH END OF
THE RISER BOARD.

1. Press the securing clips at each end of the memory socket


5-60

outward simultaneously until the module pops out slightly from


the socket (see (see Figure 5-76)).
2. Lift the module away from the socket.

NOTE:

To access the securing clips on the system board memory sockets, it


may be necessary to remove the fan for microprocessor 0. For
instructions on removing and installing the processor fan, see the
Service Manual.

Figure 5-76: Removing a Memory Module

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-133
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Installing a Memory Module

1. Press the securing clips at each end of the socket


5-61

outward until they snap open (see (see


Figure 5-76)).
2. Align the slots on the bottom of the module with
the ridges inside the socket.

CAUTION
TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE MEMORY RISER BOA
PRESS THE RISER BOARD STRAIGHT DOWN INTO T
SOCKET WITH EQUAL FORCE APPLIED AT EACH E
OF THE RISER BOARD.

3. Press the module straight down into the socket


until the securing clips snap into place at the ends
of the module. Figure 5-77: Installing a Memory Module
5-62

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-134
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Removing Memory Riser Boards

1. Remove the microprocessor airflow shroud.


5-63

2. Remove the memory riser board retention bracket


(see the following figure).
a. Lift the retention bracket up to disengage it
from the chassis.
b. Lift the bracket away from the chassis.

CAUTION
TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE MEMORY RISER
BOARD, PRESS THE RISER BOARD STRAIGHT
DOWN INTO THE SOCKET WITH EQUAL FORCE
APPLIED AT EACH END OF THE RISER BOARD.

3. Remove memory riser board A:


a. Press the securing clips of system board
memory socket 1 outward simultaneously
until riser board A pops out slightly from the
socket.
b. Lift riser board A away from the retention
brackets on riser board B.
4. Remove memory riser board B:
a. Press the securing clips of system board
memory socket B outward simultaneously
until riser board B pops out slightly from the
socket.
b. Lift riser board B away from socket 2. Figure 5-78: Removing Memory Riser Boards

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-135
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Installing Memory Riser Boards

NOTE:

System board memory sockets 3 and 4 can either be empty or contain CRIMMs. Sockets 3
and 4 cannot contain RIMMs with memory riser boards installed in sockets 1 and 2.

1. If any Memory Modules occupy memory sockets on the system board, remove those modules.

CAUTION
TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE MEMORY RISER BOARD, PRESS THE RISER BOARD
STRAIGHT DOWN INTO THE SOCKET WITH EQUAL FORCE APPLIED AT EACH END OF
THE RISER BOARD.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-136
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

2. Install memory riser board B (see (see


5-64

Figure 5-79)):
a. Align the slots on the bottom of riser board B
with the ridges inside memory socket 2 on the
system board.
The memory sockets on the riser board will face
away from the microprocessor(s).
b. Press riser board B straight down into socket
2 until the securing clips snap into place at the
ends of the riser board.
3. Install memory riser board A:
a. Align the edges of riser board A with the
retention brackets on riser board B.
b. Align the slots on the bottom of riser board A
with the ridges inside memory socket 1 on the
system board.
The memory sockets on the riser board will face
away from the microprocessor(s).
c. Press riser board A straight down into socket
1 until the securing clips snap into place at the
ends of the riser board.
4. Install the memory riser board retention bracket:
a. Lower the bracket to the chassis so that the
two bracket tabs insert into the chassis slots.
b. Press the bracket straight down until it is
secured in the chassis.

Figure 5-79: Installing Memory Riser Boards

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-137
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5. Close the computer (refer to Closing the Computer Cover).


6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
7. The computer detects that the new memory does not match the existing configuration information and generates the
following message:
The amount of system memory has changed.
Strike the F1 key to continue, F2 to run the setup utility
8. Press <F2> to enter system setup and check the value for System Memory.
9. The computer should have changed the value of System Memory to reflect the newly installed memory. Verify the new
total.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-138
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Host Computer Memory Upgrade (for Dell 650 only)


Memory Components
The following figures will help you identify memory modules and components.
5-65

5-66 5-67

Figure 5-81: Memory Slots

Figure 5-80: Memory Module Label

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-139
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Upgrading System Memory

WARNING
MEMORY MODULES CAN GET VERY HOT DURING NORMAL OPERATION. BE SURE THAT THE MEMORY MODULES HAVE
HAD SUFFICIENT TIME TO COOL BEFORE YOU TOUCH THEM.
5-68

CAUTION
FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS REGARDING ESD ANTI-STATIC PROTECTION WHEN
PERFORMING ANY PROCEDURE INSIDE THE COMPUTER. FAILURE TO DO SO CAN
CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO COMPUTER COMPONENTS AND POSSIBLE LOSS OF
DATA.

WARNING
BEFORE DISCONNECTING A DEVICE FROM THE COMPUTER, WAIT 10 TO 20 SECONDS AFTER DISCONNECTING THE
COMPUTER FROM ITS ELECTRICAL OUTLET AND VERIFY THAT THE STANDBY POWER LIGHT ON THE SYSTEM BOARD HAS
TURNED OFF.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-140
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Removing a Memory Module


1. Open the computer (refer to Section Opening the
Computer Cover). (1) notch
2. Press down and outward on the securing clips. (2) memory module
securing clips (2)
3. Grasp the module and pull up. (3) alignment keys
4. If the module is difficult to remove, gently ease the module
back and forth to remove it from the connector.
5-69

Figure 5-82: Memory Module Removal

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-141
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Inserting a Memory Module


1. Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory
module connector.
2. Align the notch on the bottom of the module with the
crossbar in the connector.
3. Insert the module into the connector, ensuring that it fits
into the guides at each end of the connector. Carefully
press each end of the module into place.
4. The memory module socket has alignment keys that allow
the memory module to be installed in the socket only one
way (see Figure 5-83).
5. Pull up on the securing clips to lock the modules into
place.
6. If you insert the module correctly, the securing clips snap
into the cutouts at each end of the module.
7. When the memory module is properly seated in the Figure 5-83: Memory Module Insertion
socket, the securing clips on the memory module socket
(1) notch
should align with the securing clips on the other sockets (2) memory module securing clips (2)
with memory modules installed. (3) alignment keys
8. Close the computer (refer to Closing the Computer
Cover).
9. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
10. The computer detects that the new memory does not match the existing configuration information and generates the
following message:
The amount of system memory has changed.
Press the F1 key to continue, F2 to run the setup utility
11. Press <F2> to enter system setup and check the value for System Memory.
12. The computer changes the size of the system memory to reflect the newly installed memory. Verify the new total.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-142
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Checking the New Memory


Verify that your system has the correct memory capacity after RAM replacement, as follows:
1. Login as root (password: mxroot).
2. Right-click on My Computer and select Properties.
3. In the General tab under Computer, you can view the RAM capacity.

CAUTION
AFTER INSTALLING OR REPLACING MEMORY YOU MUST PERFORM THE PROCEDURE
IN Software Configuration After Memory Installation.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-143
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Software Configuration After Memory Installation


After memory installation, you must modify the configuration settings in the following order:
A. mm_param File
B. Nutcracker Application
C. Virtual Memory

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-144
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

mm_param File

Modify the mm_param file as follows:


5-70

1. Log on to the Host as Administrator


(password: mxroot).
2. In the Windows Explorer, double-click on the
mm_param file in the C:\usr\tamar.root\cfg\mm
folder.
3. The Open With... window opens.
4. Highlight WordPad and click OK. The mm_param
file opens (see Figure 5-84).
5. Go to the line "int Max_Slices=".
6. Change the number of slices according to the
memory installed in the computer 10000 slices.

2 GB 4 GB

10000 slices 10000 slices

7. Click File | Save and then click File | Exit.

Figure 5-84:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-145
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Nutcracker Application

Modify the Nutcracker application as follows:


5-71

1. From the Windows Start menu, click Settings and


select Control Panel.
2. Double-click on the Nutcracker icon. The Configure
NuTCRACKER Applications window opens.
3. Click on the NuTC 4 Options tab.

Modifying Shared Mem & Msg Queue Settings

4. In the Category list, select Shared Mem & Msg Queue


Settings.
5. In the Shared Memory Section, modify the value of the
Max Number of Shared Memory IDs to 10000.

2 GB 4 GB

5000 10000

Figure 5-85:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-146
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Modifying Semaphore Settings


5-72

1. In the Category list, select Semaphore Settings (see


Figure 5-86).
2. In the Semaphores section, verify that the value of the
Max Number of Semaphore IDs is 30.

Figure 5-86:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-147
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Modifying Per-Process Miscellaneous Settings


5-73

1. In the Category list, select Per-Process


Miscellaneous Settings (see Figure 5-87).
2. In the Kernel Resources section, modify the value of
the Max Number of Kernel Resources to 4048576.

2 GB 4 GB

2048576 4048576

3. Modify the value of the Max Number of Open Files to


10000.
4. Modify the value of the Max Number of mmap()
Segments to 20000.
5. In the IPC Resources section, modify the value of the
Max Number of Shared Memory Segments to 10000.

2 GB 4 GB

5000 10000

Figure 5-87:
6. Click Apply. The message Do you want to restart?
appears. Click Restart Later. Click OK to the next
message that appears.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-148
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Virtual Memory

Modify the Virtual Memory settings as follows:


5-74

1. Right click the My Computer icon. Select Properties.


2. Select the Advanced Tab.
3. Click the Setting button in Performance.
4. Select the Advanced Tab.
5. Click Change. The Virtual Memory dialog box opens
(refer to Figure 5-88).
6. Highlight Drive C:.
7. Modify the setting for Initial Size (MB) to 4096.
8. Modify the setting for Maximum Size (MB) to 4096.

Table 5-21:

2 GB 4 GB
Initial Size (MB) 4096 4096
Maximum Size (MB) 4096 4096

9. Click OK to confirm the change and then click Close to


close the System Properties window.
10. A window opens telling you to restart the computer for
the new settings to take effect. Click Yes to restart the Figure 5-88: Mx8000 IDT Virtual Memory Dialog Box
computer.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-149
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Checking the New Memory


Verify that your system was upgraded to 4 GB RAM capacity as follows:
1. Log on as administrator (password: mxroot).
2. Right-click on My Computer and select Properties.
3. In the General tab under Computer, view the RAM capacity.
NOTE Dell Host computer displays approximately 3.5 GB instead of 4 GB.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-150
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Replacing the Battery


Replacing the Dell 650 Computer Battery

Replace the battery of the Dell 650 computer if one of the


following conditions exists:
The message in Figure 5-89 appears upon bootup
The computer does not boot up

Figure 5-89:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-151
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Removing the Battery

1 Disconnect the computers power cable.


2 Open the cover (see Opening the Computer Cover ).
3 Locate the battery on the system board (see
Figure 5-90).
CAUTION If you lift the battery out of its socket with
a blunt object, be careful not to touch the
system board with the object. Ensure
that the object is inserted between the
battery and the socket before you
attempt to lift out the battery. Otherwise,
you may damage the system board by
lifting off the socket or by breaking circuit
traces on the system board.
Figure 5-90:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-152
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

4 Remove the battery by carefully lifting it out of its


socket with your fingers or with a blunt, nonconducting
object such as a plastic screwdriver.
5 Insert the new battery into the socket with the side
labeled "+" facing up, and snap the battery into place
(see Figure 5-91).

Figure 5-91:
WARNING MAKE SURE TO DISPOSE OF THE BATTERY ACCORDING TO THE LOCAL
REGULATIONS.
6 Close the computer cover, connect all cables, and turn ON the computer.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-153
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

NOTE:
If the PERC 320 SCSI Board is listed on the bootup screen
(see Figure 5-92), or in the BIOS Boot Sequence window the computer is
configured with the RAID option. See specific instructions in the
procedures listed below.

Figure 5-92:

7 During startup the message Press F2 appears for about three seconds. Press F2 and wait for the BIOS setup menu to open.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-154
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Setting the BIOS

In the BIOS Setup:


1 Scroll to Integrated Devices and press <Enter>.
2 Set the SCSI Controller to ON.

Figure 5-93:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-155
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

3 Scroll to System Event Log and press <Enter>.


Highlight Clear System Event Log and press
<Enter> (see Figure 5-94).
4 To verify that the system even log has been cleared,
highlight Display System Event Log and press
<Enter>.
5 Press <Esc> to Save Changes and Exit.

Figure 5-94:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-156
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Replacing the Dell 530 Computer Battery

Replace the battery of the Dell 650 computer if one of the


following conditions exists:
The message in Figure 5-95 appears upon bootup
The computer does not boot up

Figure 5-95:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-157
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Removing the Battery

1 Disconnect the computers power cable.


2 Open the cover (see Opening the Computer Cover ).
3 Locate the battery on the system board (see
Figure 5-96).
CAUTION If you lift the battery out of its socket with
a blunt object, be careful not to touch the
system board with the object. Ensure
that the object is inserted between the
battery and the socket before you
attempt to lift out the battery. Otherwise,
you may damage the system board by
lifting off the socket or by breaking circuit
traces on the system board.
Figure 5-96:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-158
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

4 Remove the battery by carefully lifting it out of its


socket with your fingers or with a blunt, nonconducting
object such as a plastic screwdriver.
5 Insert the new battery into the socket with the side
labeled "+" facing up, and snap the battery into place
(see Figure 5-97).
6 Close the computer cover, connect all cables, and turn
ON the computer.
7 During startup the message Press F2 appears for
about three seconds. Press F2 and wait for the BIOS
setup menu to open.

Figure 5-97:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-159
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Setting the BIOS

In the BIOS Setup:


1 Scroll to Integrated Devices and press <Enter>.
Change the SCSI Controller to ON and press
<Enter> (see Figure 5-98).

Figure 5-98:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-160
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

2 Scroll to System Event Log and press <Enter>.


Highlight Clear System Event Log. Perform the action
by pressing <Enter> (see Figure 5-99).
To verify that the system even log has been cleared,
highlight Display System Event Log and press
<Enter>.
3 Press <Esc> to Save Changes and Exit.

Figure 5-99:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-161
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

IRS (Image Reconstruction System)

Overview
The Image Reconstruction system enables:

Acquisition of RAW data from the Gantry


Storage of RAW data
Processing of RAW to the Image (Prep, Filter, B. P.)
Fast transfer of Reconstructed Image to the Host via a LAN card

The IRS computer has the following components:


RAID0 disk array (pack of 6 disks) with a total storage space of 105GB, supporting concurrent read and write actions
SCSI RAID disk controller supports buffering of 32MB
1 Gbit/sec LAN card to support communication with the Host computer for image transfer of up to 40 images per second
IDE CD-ROM Disk for software loading
Four slots of 66MHz (64 bit) and two slots of 33MHz (32 bits)
IDE 1.44-MB floppy drive (for diagnostic purposes and file transfer)
IDE 40-GB disk for the operating system and applications
ACQ Board

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-162
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Data Acquisition and Reconstruction Process


5-75

42 Prep.
ADM'S Readings SCSI
SCAN
(Frames) MU*
Disks

______
RCOM
X-ray
ON ACQ Air Phantom HCOR
Ref. Det. Cal. Cal.

DMS Ref. Det.

Slice Normalization
*MU (Medical Unit) = log2(RAW - BIAS) Y/N

Bad Detector Correction

Poly. Correction

Lost Subfan Correction


(Arcing Correction)

IRS
Figure 5-100: Data Acquisition Flowchart

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-163
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5-76

Rebining, Back Image Balance


Axial, or Spiral, Projection and
or Cobra Filter Image Threshold
Interpolations and DDI

** Image Enhancement

IBC (Optional)
IRS

** Depending in Scan Mode

The Final Image


Figure 5-101: Data Acquisition Flowchart

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-164
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Reconstruction ProcessOverview
The Data Acquisition Flowchart (see Figure 5-100 and Figure 5-101) shows the data flow from the detectors (ADM) located on
the DMS until a final image is displayed on the monitor.
The Mx8000 IDT supports the following reconstruction types:
Axial
Spiral
Surview
Cone Beam (COBRA)

Main Reconstruction Stages


1. Get RAW
2. Prep
3. Rebining
4. Filter and DDI Interpolation
5. Back Projection (BP)
6. Image (IBCOptional)

For Surview Reconstruction


1. Get RAW
2. Prep
3. Image

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-165
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

NOTE:

All reconstruction processes are performed by the dual CPU and the BP board, using SHARCS.

1. Get Raw

The DMS transforms the detectors readings through the RCOM card into the arithmetic function:
MU (Medical Unit) = log2 [RAW-BIAS].
The ACQ card transfers the MU data into the SCSI disks array and into the IRS for reconstruction.

2. Prep

Corrections are done to the MU in the IRS computer via the software as shown in Figure 5-100.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-166
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

3. Rebining

During a scan, the readings of an


5-77

integration period appear in


Figure 5-102 as a fan beam.
Fan2
Fan1 Fan3
The reconstruction process
needs a parallel beam.
Fan beams are converted into
parallel beams by an algorithm
called rebining in Sharc 3.

Detectors:
1,2,3

1 2 3 Delta T
1 2 3
1 2
3
Parallel Rays with a common angle are Fan1 (Det1), Fan2 (Det3), Fan3 (Det5), Etc....
A group of Parallel rays of the same angle is called a View.

Figure 5-102: Rebining a Fan Beam to a Parallel Beam

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-167
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

4. Filter and DDI Interpolation

The filter stage reduces smearing caused during Back Projection.


Stray rays may have been unaffected by the rebining stage. An additional stage, DDI Interpolation, makes these stray rays
parallel.

5. Back Projection

Back projection is performed in the NT computer. Figure 5-103 shows the BP process numerically.
5-78

Image pixel
12 3 3 3 12 3 3 3 3
3 12 3 3 12 3 3 3 3
3 3 12 3 12 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 12 12 3 3 3 3
12 12 12 12 30 12 12 12 12
3 3 3 3 12 12 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 12 3 12 3 3
3 3 3 3 12 3 3 12 3
3 3 3 3 12 3 3 3 12

Each parallel beam in a view contributes a value of 1 if


the beam is going through air.

Each parallel beam in a view contributes a value of 10


if the beam is going through the object.

Figure 5-103: Back Projection

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-168
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

6. Image

Image balance, threshold, and enhancement are performed in the image stage to achieve the desired sharpness and
perspective of the final image. They are performed in the IRS computer via the software.

IBC (Interactive Bone Correction)

This algorithm reduces the bone effect on soft tissues in head scan images. This procedure (if applied) performs all of the
reconstruction steps and discovers the bone structure and limits (see Figure 5-100 and Figure 5-101).
A Forward Projection is performed on bone tissue only, the bone tissue is removed from the image.
The Filter and Back Projection process is performed again where the bone contribution for artifacts is known and corrected.
This procedure is performed on the NT computer.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-169
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

IRS Computer
The IRS is supplied in two configurations:
IRS with Pentium 3 Motherboard (original motherboard supplied with the system)
IRS with Pentium 4 Motherboard (supplied now as standard FRU)

IRS with Pentium 3 Motherboard


IRS Intel Enclosure

19 Rack mount chassis


550w Power SupplyOutput Voltage: 3.3v, 5v, 12v
Nine-bay Disk drive - six disks (two groups of three disks, each group including an active terminator), all configured as
RAID0
One IDE local disk, CDROM, and Floppy
Nine Fans:
3 Fans in the front (one to the motherboard an two to the slot cards)
2 Fans mounted to side chassis enclosure
1 Fan on Power Supply
2 Fans on two Processors
2 slot ring fans
Intel SDS2 Motherboard with Dual Pentium-3, 1.26 GHz, L2 cache 512 KB SDRAM 133 MHz 1GByte (2 X 512)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-170
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

IRS Computer Specifications


5-79

CPU 1 CPU 2

Front Side Bus (133MHz)

APIC Bus

Flash

DATA Bus (133 MHz)


System
Disk
PCI 32-bit Bus (33 MHz) ADD/CTRL (133MHz)
Registers
CSB5 HE-SL
DATA Bus (133 MHz)
USB x 4

LPC
Bus BANK 1 DIMM DIMM
Floppy

Keyboard Video
Mouse
SIO PCI Slot 3 BANK 2 DIMM DIMM
COM1
COM2
NIC 1
Parallel
BANK 3 DIMM DIMM
Port PCI Slot 4

NIC 2
BMC

PCI 64-biy Bus (66MHz, 3.3V PCI 64-biy Bus (66MHz, 3.3V Channel A
CIOB SCSI
FLASH SRAM Channel B

SCSI 1 GB
Array ACQ BP LAN
Array Cont.

RCOM
1GB
LAN
Gantry Control Control
MCU SDB Comm 2 HOST
line line

Figure 5-104: IRS Computer Block Diagram

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-171
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5-80

Power ON
Indicator

Fans Error
Reset Indicator

SCSI Disks
(channel 2)

System Disk SCSI Disks


(channel 1)

Figure 5-105: IRS Cabinet Front View

NOTE:

The Fans Function Indicator is OFF during proper functioning of the fans. Indicator color turns
red if there is a fan malfunction.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-172
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5-81

Table 5-22: IRS Intel Cables ACQ RAID Control ACQ


Monitor Fiber Optic (internal connection) Control
DESCRIPTION
Power IN cable
Parallel
Keyboard cable
Port
Mouse cable
1-Gbit LAN RJ-45 to Host I/O Port 12V Rack
ACQ Control cable Fans
ACQ Fiber optic cable Keyboard 1-Gbit LAN
Monitor displayvideo card Mouse (Host)

12V for Rack fans


1-Gbit LAN
1-Gbit LAN RJ-45 for Cardiac (optional) (Cardiac)
P.S. Switch
Parallel Port (not in use)
P.S. Fan
I/O Port (not in use)

Figure 5-106: IRS Intel Cable Connections

5-84
5-83
5-82

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-173
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

The SDS2 Server Board is a monolithic printed circuit board with two Intel Pentium III processors using the Socket 370 FCPGA2
package (1.26GHz frequency and 512KB cache size). It is designed around the ServerWorks ServerSet III HE-SL chipset.
The motherboard contains:
HE-SL CNB20 North Bridge provides an integrated memory controller
CIOB20 I/O Bridge provides the interface for two pairs 64-bit, 66 MHz PCI busses for the SCSI Controller, ACQ board,
Back Projection board and 1-Gbit LAN board
CSB5 South Bridge provides the LPC bus for legacy support, such as Floppy drive, Keyboard, Parallel Port and Serial
Port
2D/3D graphics accelerator
Standard I/O
Server management
64-bit, 66-MHz 3.3 V full-length PCI segment C (P64-C) with one embedded device
Two pairs Slots: PCI slots 1, 2, 5 and 6
LPC (Low Pin Count) bus segment with two embedded devices:
Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) providing monitoring, alerting, and logging of critical system information
obtained from embedded sensors on the Server Board
Super I/O controller chip providing all PC-compatible I/O (floppy, serial, keyboard, mouse)
X-Bus segment from CSB5 with one embedded device - Flash ROM device for system BIOS
Two IDE connectors; only one is used for an ATA-100 compatible device
Two serial ports: One out to rear I/O and one through a 10-pin header on the Server Board
One floppy connector

The SDS2 Server Board provides six DIMM sockets for a maximum memory capacity of 6 GB. The IRS is supplied with 1GB of
RAM (512MB x 2) implemented in banks 1A and 1B. Only registered PC-133 compliant SDRAM memory modules are supported.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-174
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

IRS Intel Board Configuration


5-85

1 Gbit/sec LAN Board Back Projection ACQ Board SCSI Controller


(slot 6) (slot 5) (slot 2) (slot 1)

12V P.S. for


Rack Fans

Bulk Board DIMM


Sockets

Figure 5-107: IRS Intel Boards Configuration

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-175
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Boards Location
SLOT 1: Adaptec SCSI controller board (64 bit / 66 MHz)
SLOT 2: FALCON ACQ board (64 bit / 66 MHz)
SLOT 3: Not used (32 bit / 33 MHz)
SLOT 4: Not Used (32 bit / 33 MHz)
SLOT 5: Back Projection (BP) board (64 bit / 66 MHz)
SLOT 6: 1-Gbit LAN board (64 bit / 66 MHz)

Fan Fail Alarm


One power module fan fails or system fan fails, the buzzer will beep and the red led on front panel will light (comes ON).

Real-time Clock
The Super I/O (SIO) device contains a real-time clock with external battery backup. The device also contains 242 bytes of
general purpose battery-backed CMOS RAM.

Wake-up Control
The Super I/O (SIO) device contains functionality that allows various events to control the power-on and power-off of the system.

Power-up Reset
When the system is disconnected from AC power, all logic on the Server Board is powered off. When a valid input (AC) voltage
level is provided to the power supply, 3.3 V standby power is applied to the Server Board. A power monitor circuit on 3.3 V
stand-by asserts N_RST_BMCRST_L, causing the BMC (Basement Management Controller) to reset. The BMC is powered by
3.3 V standby and monitors and controls key events in the system related to reset and power control.
5-86

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-176
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Memory Module Pairs

5-87

Table 5-23: Memory Module Pairs

MEMORY MODULE
ROW
MODULES PAIRS

1A, 1B 1 1, 2
2A, 2B 2 3, 4
3A, 3B 3 5, 6

NOTE:
The IRS is provided with one pair of 1GB RAM
(512MB x 2) inserted in Memory Module 1A and 1B
(Table 5-23)

Figure 5-108: SDS2 Memory Bank Layout

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-177
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-24: Power Supply Specifications

90V~135V AC or 180V~265V AC
Voltage rating
(selected by slide switch)

I/P Iin=115/230Vac 13A / 8A


Frequency 47Hz~63Hz
Inrush current 60A max./230V (at cold start)
Total Output current rating
DC Voltage Ripple & Noise
Reg. Min. / Max.
+3.3V 50mV 4% 0.3A / 36A
+5V 50mV 5% 0.3A / 36A
+12V 120mV 5% 1.5A / 36A
O/P
-5V 50mV 10% 0A / 1A
-12V 120mV 10% 0A / 1A
+5Vsb 50mV 5% 0.1A / 2.2A
+3.3V & +5V 200W
TOTAL O/P 550W
Hold up time 17ms min. at 230V AC full load
Over Power Protection 105%~140% of max load
+5V: 5.6V~6.9V
Over Voltage Protection +3.3V: 3.7V~4.5V
+5Vsb: 5.6V~6.9V
Efficiency 70% min. at full load
Cooling Air convection by +12V DC fan

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-178
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-24: Power Supply Specifications

0C ~25C for full rating of load,


Operation Temperature
decrease to zero Watts O/P at 70C
Storage Temperature -20C ~80C
Operating: to 85% relative humidity, non-condensing At 25C
Humidity
Storage: to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing At 50C
Dimensions W150 x H86 x D140 (mm)

Voltage

The system power supply provides +3.3V, +5V, +12V, -12V, and +5VSB and voltage regulators on the Server Board are used to
create the following voltages:
+3.3VSB
VCORE for the CPUs
VTT for the CPUs
+2.5V for the chipsets
+1.8V for the onboard SCSI

For the BP board, the +3.3v from the P.S. goes through the Bulk board to supply a stable DC voltage (eliminates the ripples on
+3.3v).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-179
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-25: Bulk Board Connections

8W8 D-POWER
CON. IRS POWER SUPPLY
COLOR AWG16 WIRE
CAPACITORS +3.3VDC
CARD J-1
+3.3VDC A3 Orange 2 BP card con.
+3.3VDC A3 Orange 2 BP card con.
+3.3VDC A4 Orange 2 BP card con.
+3.3VDC A4 Orange 2 BP card con.
3.3V Ret. A5 Black 1 BP card con.
3.3V Ret. A5 Black 1 BP card con.
3.3V Ret. A6 Black 1 BP card con.
3.3V Ret. A6 Black 1 BP card con.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-180
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

(see Figure 5-109) illustrates voltage generation and distribution on the SDS2 Server Board.
5-88

Power Supply
-12V +12V +3.3V +5VSB

5VSB 3.3VSB

NIC 1 NIC 2 Sahalee

PCI Slots

CORE
VRM

Processor Processor
1 2

VTT
VRM

DIMM

Fan Super I/O VIDEO CSB5 CIOB20 HE-SL

KB/
MS
5V 2.5V

USB

5V 1.8V

SCSI
SCSI Term

Figure 5-109: SDS2 Server Board Voltage Generation/Distribution Diagram

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-181
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Power Distribution Board Connector

The main power supply connection is obtained using a 24-pin connector. A separate 8-pin connector is used for the +12 V power
connector dedicated to providing power to the processor. A third 5-pin auxiliary signal connector is used to communicate with
the power supply. The following tables define the pin-outs of these connectors.
Table 5-26: 24-Pin Main Power Connector Pin-out

PIN SIGNAL COLOR PIN SIGNAL COLOR

1 +3.3 V Orange 13 +3.3 V Orange


2 +3.3 V Orange 14 -12 V Blue
3 COM Black 15 COM Black
4 +5 V Red 16 PS_ON# Green
5 COM Black 17 COM Black
6 +5 V Red 18 COM Black
7 COM Black 19 COM Black
8 PWR_OK Gray 20 RSVD_(-5 V) White
9 5 VSB Purple 21 +5 V Red
10 +12 V_IO Yellow 22 +5 V Red
11 +12 V_IO Yellow 23 +5 V Red
12 +3.3 V Orange 24 COM Black

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-182
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Table 5-27: 8-Pin + 12V Power Connector Pin-out

PIN SIGNAL COLOR PIN SIGNAL COLOR

1 COM_CPU Black 5 +12V_CPU Yellow


2 COM_CPU Black 6 +12V_CPU Yellow
3 COM_CPU Black 7 +12V_CPU Yellow
4 COM_CPU Black 8 +12V_CPU Yellow

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-183
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Troubleshooting

Use the Windows Event Viewer and the IRS Diagnostic Tool for IRS motherboard troubleshooting.

IRS with Pentium 4 Motherboard


IRS Enclosure

19 Rack mount chassis


550w Power SupplyOutput Voltage: 3.3V, 5V, 12V
Nine-bay Disk drive - six drives (two groups of three disks; each group with an active terminator), all disks are configured
as Raid 0
One IDE local disk, CD-ROM, and Floppy
Nine Fans:
3 Fans in the front (one to the motherboard and two to the slot cards)
2 Fans mounted on the side chassis enclosure
1 Fan on Power Supply
2 Fans on two Processors
2 Slot ring fans
Intel SE7505VB2 motherboard with Dual Pentium-4, 1.26 GHz, L2 cache 512 KB SDRAM 133 MHz 1-GB (2 X 512)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-184
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Power ON
Indicator

Fans Error
Reset Indicator

SCSI Disks
(channel 2)
System Disk
SCSI Disks
(channel 1)

Figure 5-110:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-185
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Keyboard Mouse 1 Gbit LAN

Power Supply Power Power ON/OFF ACQ Fiber 12V Rack


Fan Jack Switch Diag. Optic Fan
Figure 5-111:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-186
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Bulk Board

12V PS for
Rack Fans

BP ACQ SCSI
Board Controller

Figure 5-112: Pentium 4 Board Configuration

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-187
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

SE7505VB2 Server Board Overview

The architecture is based around the Intel E7505 chipset and is capable of supporting one or two Intel Xeon processors with
512KB L2 cache and up to 8GB of memory.
Processor/FSB support
Dual Intel Xeon processors with 512KB L2 cache using the 604-pin FCPGA processor package
Support for up to four DDR266 compliant ECC DDR DIMMs providing up to 8 GB of memory
Three separate and independent PCI buses:
Segment A: Two PCI 32-bit/33-MHz, 5 V connectors supporting full length PCI add-in cards and three embedded
devices:
2D/3D graphics controller: ATI Rage XL video controller with 8 MB of SDRAM
One Intel 10/100 82550PM Fast Ethernet Controller
Dual port Serial ATA controller: Silicon Image 3112A
Segment B: Two PCI-X 64-bit/100-MHz, 3.3 V slots supporting full length PCI / PCIX add-in cards
Segment C: One PCI 64-bit/66-MHz, 3.3 V slot supporting full length PCI add-in cards and one embedded
component:
Intel 82540EM 10/100/1000 gigabit Ethernet controller
LPC (Low Pin Count) bus segment with two embedded devices:
Super I/O (sIO) controller chip, Winbond* 83627HF, providing all PC-compatible I/O (floppy, serial, keyboard, mouse,
parallel) and integrated hardware monitoring
Flash ROM device for system BIOS
Graphic AGP 3.0 Pro50 watt supports 1.5V signal levels only
Three external Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports with an additional internal header providing one optional USB ports for
front panel support.
Two IDE connectors, supporting up to four ATA-100 compatible devices
Support for up to four system fans and two processor fans
SSI-compliant connectors for SSI interface support: front panel and power connectors.
The following figure below shows the functional blocks of the server board and the plug-in modules that it supports.
Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-188
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Figure 5-113: IRS Motherboard Block Diagram

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-189
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

The Intel chipset E7505 provides a 36-bit address, 64-bit data processor host bus interface, operating at 533 MHz. The hub
interface provides the interface to two 64-bit/100-MHz PCI-X buses and one 64-bit/66-MHz PCI bus via the P64H2, and the
interface to two 32-bit/33-MHz PCI buses via the ICH4. The board directly supports up to 8 GB of ECC memory, using four
DDR266 compliant ECC DIMMs.
The Intel Server Board SE7505VB2 supports two processors in the 604-pin FCPGA package.

NOTE:
When two processors are installed, all processors must be of identical revision, core voltage, and bus/core speed.

Processor VRD
The Intel Server Board SE7505VB2 has a single VRD (Voltage Regulator Down) to support two processors. It is compliant with
the VRM 9.1 specification and provides a maximum of 130 AMPs, which is capable of supporting the requirements for two Intel
Xeon processors.
The board hardware and PMC (Power Management Controller) must read the processor VID (voltage identification) bits for each
processor before turning ON the VRD. If the VIDs of the two processors are not identical, then the PMC will not turn ON the VRD.

Reset Configuration Logic


The BIOS determines the processor stepping, cache size, etc. through the CPUID instruction.
The requirements are as follows:
All processors in the system must operate at the same frequency, have the same cache sizes, and same VID. No mixing
of product families is supported.
Processors run at a fixed speed and cannot be programmed to operate at a lower or higher speed.

Processor Module Presence Detection


Logic is provided on the baseboard to detect the presence and identity of installed processors. The PMC checks the logic and
will not turn ON the system DC power unless the VIDs of both the processors match.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-190
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Memory Subsystem
The baseboard supports up to four DIMM slots for a maximum memory capacity of 8 GB.
The minimum supported DIMM size is 128 MB. The largest size DIMM supported is a 2 GB.
There are two banks of DIMMs, labeled 1 and 2. Bank 1 contains DIMM socket locations 1A
and 1B. Bank 2 contains 2A and 2B. The sockets associated with each bank are located next
to each other and the DIMM socket identifiers are marked on the baseboard silkscreen, near
the DIMM socket.

Table 5-28:
Memory DIMM Bank
J9H1 (DIMM 1A), J9H2 (DIMM 1B) 1
J9J1 (DIMM 2A), J9J2 (DIMM 2B) 2

The Intel E7505 Chipset

The Intel Server Board SE7505VB2 is designed around the Intel E7505 chipset. The chipset
provides an integrated I/O bridge and memory controller, and a flexible I/O subsystem core
(PCI / PCI-X). This is targeted for multiprocessor systems and standard high-volume servers.
The chipset consists of three components:

MCH: Memory Control Hub


The MCH accepts access requests from the host (processor) bus and directs those accesses
to memory or to one of the PCI buses. The MCH also accepts inbound requests from the P64H2
and the ICH4. The MCH is responsible for generating the appropriate controls to control data
transfer to and from memory.

P64H2: PCI-X 64bit Hub 2.0 I/O Bridge


The P64H2 provides the interface for two PCIX buses capable of 133MHz operation. Figure 5-114: Memory Bank
Label Definition

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-191
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

ICH4: I/O Controller Hub 4


The ICH4 controller has several components, provides the interface for a 32-bit/33-MHz PCI bus, includes a USB 2.0 controller
and an IDE controller, responsible for much of the power management functions, provides a number of GPIO pins, and has the
LPC bus to support low speed legacy I/O.

P64H2
The P64H2 is a 567-ball FC-BGA device that provides an integrated I/O bridge for a high performance data flow path between
the HI 2.0 bus and the 64-bit I/O subsystem. This subsystem supports peer 64-bit PCI-X segments.

ICH4
The ICH4 is a multi-function device that provides a PCI bridge, a PCI IDE interface, a PCI USB controller, and a power
management controller. The board uses the following the ICH4 features:
PCI bus interface
LPC bus interface
IDE interface, with Ultra DMA 100 capability
Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 interface
PC-compatible timer/counter and DMA controllers
APIC and 8259 interrupt controller
Power management
System RTC
General Purpose I/O (GPIO)

Super I/O
The Winbond 83627HF sIO device contains all of the necessary circuitry to control the following features:
GPIOs - General Purpose Input/Output pins for internal interrupts (clear password, recovery mode, flash ROM, etc.)
Two serial ports
Floppy
Keyboard and mouse
Local hardware monitoring

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-192
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Wake up control (Power ON / Power OFF control)

Network Interface Controller (NIC)


The server board SE7505VB2 supports one 10Base-T/100Base-TX network interface controller (NIC) and one gigabit network
interface controller (NIC 2).

Table 5-29: NIC1 and NIC2 Rear Panel LED Description


NIC LED Color LED State Description
NIC (10/100 Mbit) Off 10 Mbps
Left LED
Solid Green 100 Mbps
On On
Right LED
Blinking Green Transmit/receive activity
NIC2 (Gigabit) Off No network connection
Left LED Solid Amber Network connection in place
Blinking Amber Transmit/receive activity
Off 10 Mbps connection
Right LED Solid Amber 100 Mbps connection
Solid Green 1000 Mbps connection

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-193
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Main Power Connector


The main power supply connection is obtained using the 24-pin connector. Table 5-30 defines the pin-outs of the connector.

Table 5-30:
Color Signal Pin Pin Signal Color
Orange 3.3V 13 1 3.3V Orange
Blue -12V 14 2 3.3V Orange
Black GND 15 3 GND Black
Green DC_ON# 16 4 +5V Red
Black GND 17 5 GND Black
Black GND 18 6 +5V Red
Black GND 19 7 GND Black
White 20 8 PS_GOOD Gray
Red +5V 21 9 SB5V Purple
Red +5V 22 10 +12V Yellow
Red +5V 23 11 +12V Yellow
Black GND 24 12 3.3V Orange

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-194
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Pentium 4 Bios Settings


In case the IRS computer boots up to a blue screen (no reaction) use the following procedure:
1. Turn OFF the IRS computer and open the cover.
2. Set the BIOS to the Default setting using the on-board jumpers. Turn ON the computer.
3. Turn OFF the IRS computer and remove the jumper.
4. Close the cover and turn ON the computer. The computer boots up with the Default BIOS setting.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the BIOS setting.
6. Configure the BIOS settings according to the following screens.

Figure 5-115:

Figure 5-116:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-195
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Figure 5-118:

Figure 5-117:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-196
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Figure 5-120:

Figure 5-119:

Figure 5-121:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-197
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

ACQ (Acquisitor) Board


Overview
The Acquisitor Board connects the IRS computer to
the Gantry through a high-speed 800MB/sec fiber PCI BUS - 66MHz/64bit
optic transceiver. The data of the fiber optic link is
the measurement data (Log2 [RAW-BIAS] + Header
+ Footer) obtained from the RCOM in the Gantry. In GANTRY
addition, there is a 25-pin connector on which control
Measurement ACQ Back 1Gbit
I/O signals between the Acquisitor board and the
Board Proj LAN
Gantry are connected. Data
Card
Control lines
The ACQ card performs data validation and safety
checks, and has the ability to stop radiation in case IRS
of safety problems detected in data transfers. Computer
The ACQ card has a memory buffer of 800MB for the
acquired data. Ethernet
10/100/1000 Mbps
A resend mechanism is used in case wrong data has ECG Pulmo 1Gbit
arrived to the ACQ. LAN
HOST

Figure 5-122: Block Diagram of the Acquisitor Board in the IRS Intel
System

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-198
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Functional Description
The Acquisitor Board is the interface between the RCOM on the DMS Assembly and the IRS (motherboard and SCSI disk).
The Acquisitor receives measurement data via the Fiber Optic Transceiver and the high-speed data link chip set. The Acquisitor
temporarily stores the data in a 128Mbyte Micron SDRAM, and then outputs the data via the 64-bit 66MHz PCI Interface to the
Reconstruction processes and to storage in the SCSI Disk Array.
The measured data received via the fiber optic from the RCOM Board in the DMS includes n rows of detectors (n = 2, 4, 8, or
16) containing 672 detectors per row during each integration time.
The detector values (measurement data) of all n rows plus supplementary data (headers and footers) are packed into one data
structure called a Reading. One Reading is transferred between the Gantry and the Acquisitor board during one integration
time.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-199
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5-89

ACQUISITOR
BLOCK DIAGRAM

COMM_OK, ACQ_OK

TERMINAL
CONTROL

PULMO
EKG
64 bit 66MHz PCI General Purpose Connector
120 pin connector
Connector

4 Links 2x2 4x2


2 Sports
RS232
Optocoupler
64 Optocoupler

8 16 HFBR-53D5
HDMP-1034
DSP EPROM FPGA 1 FPGA 2 Rx
Fiber Optic
Tx/Rx

64
128 MBytes HDMP-1032
SDRAM Tx
16
64
For Test

512Kx64
FLASH
SBSRAM CPLD
x4
x2

Power 3.3V
Supply
DC/DC
2.5V

Figure 5-123: Acquisitor Board Block Diagram

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-200
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

The measurement data is received optically and is transmitted to FPGA2. The FPGA2 performs the following functions:
Start Communication
Perform CRC check on the header words and the data
Safety checks
Issue control signals
Create counter with 1ms resolution
Receive and write data from the ECG and Pulmo
Write the data to the SDRAM
Write the data to the PCI Bus

FPGA1 contains:
Master Target 64 bit 66 MHz PCI interfaces. It is fully compliant to the PCI Local Bus Specification Rev 2.2.
Two DMA channels accessible from the local and PCI side.
An eight-mailbox register of 32 bits each.

The FPGA1 connects to the PCI side and the local side of the Analog Devices ADSP-21160 Hammerhead SHARC DSP.
The PCI FPGA1 is loaded on power up by an Altera EPC2TC32 in system programmable EPROM.
The DSP is an Analog Devices Hammerhead SHARC ADSP-21160 high performance 64 data bit microcomputer.
The DSP has:
4 Mbits of internal SRAM
4 Mbytes of external SBSRAM arranged as 512K X 64 bit words.
The DSP also connects to 16 Mbytes of Flash memory arranged as 2M X 64 Bit words.
A general purpose 25-pin D type connector is provided for the control signals - COMM_OK, ACQ_OK.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-201
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Detailed Description

Input Data Definition


The data is input at the rate of 40 to 60 Mwords per second where a word is defined as 16 bits. The measurement data reading
consists of a header followed by the data. The length of the header is 64 16-bit words (128 bytes) of which 56 words are the
reading header and 8 words are the block footer, and then a CRC word. In addition the Reading begins with a command word
like Header Start or Slice Start.
A Reading is defined as all data from the same angular and focal position.
Every command word is preceded by at least one idle word that is sent whenever no data is transmitted. An idle word is
ignored. Every command word is sent twice.

Data Format
Listed below is an example of the data format for one reading for a 16 slice scanner:
5-90

Sync Sync Slice 2, data, 672 words


Header start command, 1 word Slice start command, 1 word Block footer, 8 words
Sync Slice 1, data, 672 words CRC slice 2, 1 word
Header start command, 1 word Block footer, 8 words .
Header, data, 56 words CRC slice 1, 1 word .
Block footer, 8 words Sync Sync
CRC header. 1 word Slice start command, 1 word Slice start command, 1 word
Sync Sync Slice 16, data, 672 words
Slice start command, 1 word Slice start command, 1 word Block footer, 8 words
CRC slice 16, 1 word

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-202
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Header Words
The 56 Reading Header words and eight word block footer words are listed below.

WORD # PARAMETER NAME WORD # PARAMETER NAME WORD # PARAMETER NAME


1 DMS Type 23 Time Stamp low 45
2 DMS Status 24 Time Stamp high 46
3 DMS Error 25 UID unique identifier 47
4 Integration time 26 Scan Counter 48
5 Reference Detector 27 49
6 Detectors Temperature 1 28 50
7 Detectors Temperature 2 29 51
8 Fans Speed 30 52
9 Reading No. Low 31 53
10 Reading No. High 32 54
11 ASIC mode low 33 55
12 ASIC mode high 34 56
13 DAS_cnt 1 35 57 Reading No. Low
14 DAS_cnt 2 36 58 Reading No. High
15 37 59 Physical Slice Number=0
16 Vertical Table Position 38 60 Logical Slice Number=0
17 Table Position 39 61 Reserved
18 Gantry tilt 40 ECG 62 Reserved
19 Rotation Angle 41 Pulmo 63 Reserved
20 Reconstruction angle 42 64 Stamp
21 HW lines 43
22 44

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-203
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Block Footer Words


The Block Footer is also shown in the Header words above as words 57-64 of the header.

Table 5-31:

WORD # DESCRIPTION

1. Reading number low


2 Reading number high
3 Physical Slice Number
4 Logical Slice Number
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Stamp

Checking the Header Words


The FPGA2 checks only six of the 64 16-bit Header words and if there are discrepancies in the Header/Footer, the ACQ will
send an ACQ_OK signal to the MCU. The six words are as follows:
DMS Status
DMS Error
HW Lines
Reading # Low
Reading # High
Slice #

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-204
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Resend Mechanism
In the case where the CRC check fails at any point within a Reading that includes the header and any of the N slices, the resend
mechanism is used. The resend mechanism uses one of the Acquisitor output control signals COMM_OK to indicate that the
previous reading was good.

Resend Policy
The Readings CRC word is checked and a Reading acknowledge (COMM_OK) signal is sent to the RCOM card. In case the
Readings CRC check failed, no Reading acknowledge is sent and after a certain time the failed Reading is re-sent.
The Resend mechanism is implemented on 2 terminals: RCOM as a transmitter and ACQUISITOR as a receiver.
5-91

Serial Data
RCOM Board ACQ Board
(on rotor) (on IRS)
comm_ok

Figure 5-124: Schematic Connection of Resend Mechanism

The following assumptions and conventions are made:


1. The Readings are transmitted on the serial line all the time, without intermission.
2. No sub-Readings are sent only complete Readings.
3. The COMM_OK line is used by the Acquisitor Board to inform the transmitter circuit (on the RCOM board) of good
reception of the last transmitted Reading.
4. The acknowledgement is done by the transition of levels of COMM_OK signal, high to low transition or low to high
transition.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-205
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Description of the Resend Mechanism


5-92

*Confirm cm
Reading #1 Reading #2 Reading #3 Reading #4 Reading #3 Reading #4 Reading #5
com

comm_ok

*Ack fr. #1 Ack fr. #2 No Ack Resend fr. #3 Send fr. #4

Figure 5-125: Relations Between Readings and the COMM_OK Line

* Ack fr. #1 = acknowledge of the reception of Readings no. 1.


* confirm cm = Confirm Commands.
* Reading #3 is sent with Header Resend command.

In case of no transition of COMM_OK (no ACK), the RCOM (transmitter) sends the CONFIRM commands, until the receiver
(Acquisitor) acknowledges the Confirm commands by a COMM_OK level transition. In this way, the system re-assures that both
sides (Tx and Rx) know that a resend frame is going to be sent.
The first Reading after the Confirm commands begins with the Header RESEND (in Figure 5-125 it is Resend Frame#3), and
every slice within the first Reading starts with the Slice Resend command. The following Readings start with the regular Header
Start command.
When working with the resend mechanism in the case of a bad CRC check, the data is still written into the SDRAM by the
FPGA. When the FPGA detects the Command word Confirm which is 0x0014 and then the Resend command word 0x0102
it writes the following Reading into the same location as the Reading that had a bad CRC check. Thus it is as if the write pointer
for the bad reading remains what it was at the beginning of the reading and is not incremented.

Writing the SDRAM Data on the PCI Bus


The Readings that are accumulated in the SDRAM are transferred to the SCSI controller via the 66 MHz (64 bit) PCI Bus. There
is enough time to write to the 2 places and allow the DSP to read from the SDRAM.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-206
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

The process by which the data is written out of the Acquisitor board onto the PCI Bus is called the Reading Handling. Two
options of what is performing the Reading Handling shall be supported:
The local processor DSP
The Pentium Host processor.

The Control Signals


There are a number of control signals that are connected between the Acquisitor and the Gantry. The Gantry is galvanically
separated from Acquisitor. All signals are transmitted differentially and received by fast optocoupler. The signals are:
COMM_OK
ACQ_OK
TRIGGER_IN1
TRIGGER_IN2
EN_ACQ_OK
XRAY_ON

COMM_OK - [Acquisitor to RCOM]


The transition (low to high or high to low) acknowledges the Reading sender (RCOM card) of correct reception (no CRC error).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-207
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

ACQ_OK - [Acquisitor to MCU]

This signal is called the safety line. Acq_ok will stop the
5-93

scan if found that: en_acq_test

Patient radiated and no data


acq_ok
Resend is performed too long & internal acq_ok
Monitors real time couch position MCU Acquisitor
Partial data was collected during spiral or
surview. Figure 5-126:
There are many more hazards that the ACQ will drop the
scan with Acq_ok line. The FPGA hardware de-asserts
the Acq_ok signal only during a watchdog
time-out. When de-asserted the X-ray radiation is
turned OFF.

TRIGGER_IN1 - [MCU to Acquisitor]


This signal is the ECG Trigger. When a transition from 1 to 0 or from 0 to 1 occurs on this line then the FPGA causes an interrupt
to the DSP.
Trigger_In1, Trigger_In2, En_Acq_ok, and Xray_on are received differentially.

TRIGGER_IN2 - [MCU to Acquisitor]


This signal is the Pulmo Trigger. When a transition from 1 to 0 or from 0 to 1 occurs on this line the FPGA will cause an interrupt
to the DSP.

EN_ACQ_OK - [MCU to Acquisitor]


If de-asserted then Acq_ok shall be de-asserted. Otherwise Acq_ok depends on the cards status. This line is used to test the
safety line Acq_ok during INIT phase.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-208
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

XRAY_ON - [MCU to Acquisitor]


This signal is an indication that the X-RAY radiation is on.

Serial Communication Signals


Txd
Rxd

TXD - [Acquisitor to Terminal]


A serial communication line, used for diagnostic purposes to communicate with the DSP processor.

RXD - [Terminal to Acquisitor]


A serial communication line, used for diagnostic purposes to communicate with the DSP processor.
The TXD and the RXD shall be an electrically isolated RS232 driver receiver pair.

Back Projection Board


Functional Description
The Back Projection Board performs the reconstruction of the image from the projection data. The board reconstructs a picture
of 256 x 256 / 512 X 512 / 768 x 768 or 1024 x 1024 pixels, 64 pixels at a time. All the necessary information for reconstructing
the amplitude of the pixels within the 64-pixel block is uploaded into the Back Projection boards, via FPGA Core and to the
individual Computational Memory Units.
The path of the wedge information between the FPGA Core and the FPGA-A is via Local Bus, and then from the FPGA-A to the
Computational Memory Units via the Link Ports.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-209
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

The board consists of a cluster


5-94

of four SHARC Hammerhead


DSPs operating at 80
MHZ. The DSPs share a
common address and data bus,
as well as 128 256 Mbytes of
SDRAM and 16 Mbytes of
Flash memory. The Data is
input to the board via the 64-bit
66 MHz PCI Bus to an Altera
FPGA, which contains a PCI
Bridge, that passes the data to
the Local DSP Bus and into the
shared SDRAM.
Each DSP Cluster operates
with its Computational Memory
Units.
There are four Computational
Memory Units on the Back
Projection Board. The Figure 5-127: Back Projection Block Diagram
Computational Memory Units
made of three Quad Memory units, contains six FPGAs and 24 SDRAMs.
The DSP organize the wedge information which can be viewed as matrices, and transmit the data to the Computational Memory
Units.
The FPGAs in the Computational Memory Unit accumulate (and interpolate) detector information according to the parameters
from the DSP and finally download to the FPGA-A (see Figure 5-127).
The data accumulates in one of the FPGA-As and transfer an image on PCI 64 bit /66 MHz bus via FPGA Core back to the
motherboard for continued reconstruction.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-210
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Voltage and Current (Main Board plus 3 Modules)


3.3 Volts +/-10%, 20 Ampere (stable 3.3v comes from the Bulk Board)
2.5 Volts +/-10%, 3.38 Ampere
1.8 Volts +/-10%, 5.46 Ampere
Total Watts 84.3 Watts

Communication with IRS (LAN Card Gigabit)


The communication to the IRS system for image transfer (from the IRS to the Host computer) is done via the LAN card in TCP/IP
protocol at a rate of a 1-Gbits directly from the LAN card.

Intel PRO/1000
Intel_ 82543GC Gigabit Controller
10/100/1000 Mbps

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-211
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Mega Raid SCSI Controller


5-95

5-96 5-97

Channel-1 Channel-2
Disk CH-1 ID-1
Disk CH-1 ID-2
Disk CH-1 ID-3

Disk CH-2 ID-1


Disk CH-2 ID-2
Disk CH-2 ID-3

Figure 5-129: Disk Channels

Figure 5-128: SCSI Array Disk

The Mega RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) Elite 1600 LVD (Low Voltage Differential SCSI) PCI RAID controller
card provides two SCSI channels (Figure 5-128 and Figure 5-129). Using LVD, you can use cables up to 25 meters long.
Throughput on each SCSI channel can be as high as 160 MB/s. The SCSI Controller supports both a low voltage differential
SCSI bus and a single ended SCSI bus.
The 64-Bit LVD card is a high performance intelligent PCI-to-SCSI adapter with RAID control capabilities. The card does not
require a special motherboard PCI expansion slot.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-212
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

The Mega RAID Elite 1600 card includes an Intel I960RN Processor, which provides reliability, high performance and
fault-tolerant disk subsystem management.
SCSI Channels: The SCSI Controller has two 160M SCSI channels. Each SCSI channel supports up to fifteen 160M SCSI
devices.
SCSI Connectors: The SCSI Controller has two ultra high-density 68-pin external SCSI connectors and two 68-pin internal
SCSI connectors for internal SCSI drives.
NVRAM and Flash ROM: A 32 KB x 8 NVRAM stores RAID system configuration information. The firmware is stored in flash
memory for easy upgrade.

Introduction to RAID

RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) is an array of multiple independent hard disk drives that provide high performance
and fault tolerance. A RAID disk subsystem improves I/O performance.
The RAID array enhances data storage reliability and fault tolerance. It appears to the IRS computer as a single storage unit,.
You can prevent data loss caused by disk failure by reconstructing missing data from the remaining data and parity drives.

Consistency Check

Consistency check verifies the correctness of redundant data in an array.


For example, in a system with dedicated parity, checking consistency means computing the parity of the data drives and
comparing the results to the contents of the dedicated parity drive.

Logical Drive

A logical drive is a partition in a physical array of disks that is made up of contiguous data segments on the physical disks. A
logical drive can consist of any of the following:
Entire physical array
More than one entire physical array
Part of an array

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-213
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Parts of more than one array


Combination of any two of the above conditions

RAID Levels

The Mega RAID supports all standard RAID levels (0,1,3,and 5) and levels 10, 30, and 50 (with special RAID versions).
In the IRS computer the MEGA RAID is configured as level 0.

RAID0

Provides disk striping across all drives in the RAID subsystem. It does not provide any data redundancy or fault tolerance, but
does offer the best performance of any RAID level, with a high bandwidth.
RAID0 breaks up data into smaller blocks and then writes a block to each disk in the array. The size of each block is determined
by the stripe size parameter, set during the creation of the RAID set. By breaking up a large file into smaller blocks, Mega RAID
can use multiple SCSI channels and drives to read or write the file faster.
RAID0 involves no parity calculations to complicate the write operation. This makes RAID0 ideal for applications that require
high bandwidth but do not require fault tolerance.
Strong Points - provides increased data throughput for large files. No capacity loss penalty for parity.
Weak Points - does not provide data redundancy or fault tolerance. All data are lost if any drive fails.

CAUTION
MOVING THE IRS COMPUTER WHILE THE POWER IS ON DAMAGES THE DISK DRIVES.
YOU MUST TURN THE POWER OFF AND WAIT 30 SECONDS BEFORE PULLING OUT
THE IRS TRAY FROM THE COMPUTER RACK.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-214
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

SCSI Disk Array Configuration (IRS)


When one of the SCSI tests fails or the system can not recognize Drive E:, reconfigure the SCSI Disk Array in the BIOS.

NOTE:

Before you format or reconfigure the SCSI Disk Array, make sure that the required RAW files
are backed up.

1. Copy the file IRS_startup.raw to Drive D:


2. Turn the IRS OFF, wait at least one minute, and then turn IRS ON.
3. When the message "Spinning SCSI Device" appears on the screen, press Caps Lock ON, then press Ctrl + M. The
MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility window appears with the Management Menu (see Figure 5-130).
5-98 5-99

Figure 5-131: Objects Menu


Figure 5-130: Management Menu

4. Select Configure and press <Enter>. The Configure Menu appears (see Figure 5-131).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-215
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5. Select New Configuration and press <Enter>. The computer searches for connected SCSI devices, and the New
Configuration - Array Selection Menu appears showing six disks, three in each channel (see Figure 5-132).
5-100 5-101

Figure 5-132: New Configuration - Array Selection Menu Figure 5-133: Logical Drivers Configured Screen

6. Press <Spacebar> six times, once for each disk. The status message changes from Ready to Online with a different ID
for each disk.
7. Press <Enter> twice. The Logical Drivers Configured screen appears (see Figure 5-133).
8. Select Raid from the Logical Drive menu and press <Enter>. The Raid Level List appears. (see Figure 5-134) Select
RAID0 and press <Enter>.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-216
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

9. Select Advanced Menu from the Logical Drive menu and press <Enter>. The Advanced Information screen appears
(see Figure 5-135). Verify the following:
StripeSize = 64KB
Write Policy = WRTHRU
Read Policy = Normal
Cache policy = Direct IO
Press <Esc> to return to the Logical Drive menu.
5-102 5-103

Figure 5-134: Raid Level List Figure 5-135: Advanced Information Screen

10. Select Accept and press <Enter> twice. A verification message appears (see Figure 5-136). Select Yes and press
<Enter> to save the configuration. A confirmation message appears. Press any key to continue and press <Esc> to
return to the Management Menu.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-217
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

11. Select Initialize and press <Enter>. The Logical Drivers list appears (see Figure 5-137). Press Spacebar to select
Logical Drive 1, and press F10. A verification message appears. Select Yes and press <Enter> to begin initialization.

5-106

5-104

Figure 5-136: Save New Configuration


5-105

Figure 5-137: Logical Drivers List


12.

13. Upon completion of initialization, press any key to continue. Press <Esc> twice. An Exit message appears. Select Yes
and press <Enter> to exit.
14. The message Press Ctrl + Alt + Del to reboot appears. Turn the IRS OFF, and turn the IRS ON. Log on to the IRS.

Formatting the SCSI Disk

1. From the Windows Start menu, select Programs|Administrative Tools|Disk Administrator. The Updating System
Configuration message appears (see Figure 5-138).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-218
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5-107

Figure 5-138: Updating System Configuration Message

2. Click OK and a verification message appears.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-219
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

3. Click Yes and the Disk Administrator Window appears (see Figure 5-139).
5-108

Figure 5-139: Disk Administrator Window

NOTE:

Disk 0 is an EIDE disk with two partitions; Drive C and Drive D.


Disk 1 is a SCSI RAID0 Array with one partition; Drive E.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-220
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

4. Right-click on the Disk 1 free space. Select Create from the shortcut menu. The Create Primary Partition dialog box
appears (see Figure 5-140).
5-109

Figure 5-140: Create Primary Partition Dialog Box

5. Click OK. A verification message appears. Click Yes to create the partition. Disk 1 now becomes Disk E.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-221
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

6. Right-click on the Disk E free space in the Disk Administrator dialog box. Select Commit Changes Now from the shortcut
menu. A verification message appears. Click Yes to update changes. The following message appears (see Figure
5-141):
5-110

Figure 5-141: Create Emergency Repair Disk

7. Click OK to the message above: "Disks were updated successfully.".

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-222
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

8. Right-click on the Disk E free space in the Disk


5-111

Administrator dialog box. Select Format from


the shortcut menu. The Format E:\ dialog box
appears (see Figure 5-142).
9. Select NTFS from the File System list and check
Quick Format from the Format Options.
Click Start to begin formatting. A message
appears when formatting is complete. Click OK.
10. Exit the Disk Administrator application.
11. Enter Windows Explorer, and create a new folder:
E:\RAWS
12. Copy the storage file IRS_startup.raw from Drive
D: to E:\RAWS.
13. Insert the Reference RAW CD (from the supplied
software package), install in E:\RAWS, and verify
that the files are all "Read Only" (from the
Properties option).

Figure 5-142: Format E:\ Dialog box

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-223
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

SCSI RAID Disk Maintenance


This section provides the tools to test, debug, and resolve disk failures. If a failure is found during testing, in most cases, the
performance can be restored by just formatting the IRS SCSI disk. In some cases, the faulty disk must be replaced. Perform
these tests during the following procedures:
Each visit on site
New system installation
Each planned maintenance
Software upgrade
IRS replacement
SCSI disk replacement

CAUTION
MOVING THE IRS COMPUTER WHILE THE POWER IS ON DAMAGES THE DISKS. YOU
MUST SWITCH THE POWER OFF AND WAIT 30 SECONDS BEFORE PULLING OUT THE
IRS TRAY FROM THE COMPUTER RACK.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-224
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Enabling SMART Log Checking


SMART is an acronym for Self-Monitoring Analysis
and Reporting Technology. SMART hard disk drives
monitor their own physical performance, such as
spin-up times, re-write tries, seek times, and bad
sectors. By enabling SMART log checking, it is
possible to view errors in the SCSI disks in the
Windows Event Viewer.
Check if the SMART log is activated by opening the
Windows Event Viewer and looking for
MegaServ.log messages. If you do not see
messages, follow the procedure below (required
only once):
1. Click Start | Run, type: cmd and click OK to
open a command window.
2. Type: megactrl -start and press <Enter>.
Ignore any error message that appears by
clicking OK.
3. Type: megactrl -SMART9999 and press Figure 5-143:
<Enter>.
To view the SMART log, open the Windows Event Viewer as follows:
1. Click Start | Programs | Administrative Tools | Event Viewer. The Event Viewer opens (see Figure 5-144).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-225
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

2. Verify that Application in the Log menu is checked (see Figure 5-144).
3. Double-click on the MegaServ.log entry. An Event Detail window opens. The Event
Detail window gives a description of any error that occurs in one of the disks.
The example in Figure 5-143 displays an error in Channel 1, Disk 3.
4. Repeat Step 3 for all MegaServ.log entries within the past week.
5. In case the Media Error Count is greater than zero in one of the disks, replace the
defective disk. After replacement, make sure to re-configure the SCSI RAID Disk at the
BIOS and Windows level (follow the instructions in Section SCSI Disk Array
Figure 5-144:
Configuration (IRS).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-226
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Accessing Service Tools

CAUTION
DURING SCSI DISK REPLACEMENT DO NOT FORGET TO REMOVE THE ID
JUMPER FROM THE FAULTY SCSI DISK AND PLACE IT ON NEW DISK IN
THE SAME POSITION.
Before you format or replace a disk, check with the customer regarding needed raw files.

NOTE:
Before you format or replace a disk, check with the customer regarding needed
raw files.

1. Close the master.exe application (black and white windows) on the IRS.
2. In My Computer, open the E:\Raws directory.
3. Copy the file _IRS_Startup.raw to Drive D.
4. Access all service and diagnostic tools for the IRS from the Service Tools dialog
box.
5. On the Desktop, click the Shortcut to Service Tools icon.
6. The Service Tools dialog box opens (see Figure 5-145).

Figure 5-145:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-227
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

SCSI (Long) Test

NOTE:
Stages 2 to 5 use a reference RAW data, stored in the IRS SCSI disk during the Software Installation. Verify
that all reference RAWs store (read only files).

1. On the Service Tools dialog box, click SCSI Test.


2. The TCC (Test Control Center) with the Long SCSI Test scenario opens (see Figure 5-146).
5-112

Figure 5-146:

3. Select the SCSI Test scenario on the left panel and click Run (see Figure 5-146).

4. Click Yes at the end and click Errors Filter to see if there are any Error/ Warning messages in the stages. Verify that
all five stages PASS without any error/ warning messages.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-228
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5. Exit the TCC.


If Stage #1 fails, format the failed disk See Section Configuring the SCSI RAID to Five Disks and re-configure the SCSI RAID
Disk at the BIOS and Windows level (follow the instructions in Section SCSI Disk Array Configuration (IRS). If the same disk fails
a second time, replace it.
Stage #2 will always pass.
If one or more of Stages #3 to #5 fail, delete all the Patient RAW data from the E:\Raws directory.

NOTE:
The reference RAWs are set as Read Only. Do not delete the Reference RAWs

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-229
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Power Console Plus Test

1. In the Service Tools dialog box, click Power Console Plus.


2. In the Access Mode select View Only and click OK.
The system starts to scan the SCSI RAID disk and opens the MegaRAID Power Console Plus dialog (see Figure 5-147).
5-113

Figure 5-147: MegaRAID Power Console Plus

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-230
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

3. Verify that you see three disks in Channels 1-RAID and three in Channels 2-RAID in the Physical Devices window. (as in
Figure 5-147 above)

NOTE:
When disks (shown in the Physical Devices window) are displayed in red, this indicates that the
Power Console Plus Test could not establish communications with the disk (because of a faulty
disk or contact problem).

4. Select all disks in Channels 1 and 2 and either click on this button or, from the Physical Drv menu, select
Properties to display the properties of the selected physical drive (see Figure 5-148).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-231
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5. Verify that all disk properties have


Device Identification details and
the Media Error is 0 (zero).
6. Skip between the disks by clicking
Next Drive at the bottom of the
Physical Drive Properties dialog.
7. If the Media Error > 0 (see
Figure 5-148), format the disk See
Section Configuring the SCSI
RAID to Five Disks.
8. If there are Predictable or SMART
Error messages written under Non
Media Error script, replace the
disk (see Figure 5-148).

Number of errors
in media listed here
Warning / Errors
messages listed here

Figure 5-148:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-232
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Click to open the Log file, or from the Adapter menu click View Log. The View Log File window open (see Figure 5-149).
5-114

byte 12
byte 13
byte 3

Figure 5-149:

9. Read Byte 3 (third byte from the left) on the Sense Data line in the MegaRAID log file.
If Byte 3 = 03, format the disk See Section Configuring the SCSI RAID to Five Disks
If Byte 3 = 04, replace the disk (Re-configure the SCSI RAID Disk at the BIOS and Windows levelfollow the instructions
in Section See Section SCSI Disk Array Configuration (IRS).
If bytes 12, 13 = 5d 00, replace the faulty disk listed in the line preceded by NOTIFY.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-233
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Sea Tools Enterprise

1. Open the Sea Tools Enterprise utility. Click Start | Programs | Sea Tools Enterprise and click Continue on the start
window.
2. Select Advanced from the View menu and click Yes to confirm the warning message Figure 5-150.
5-115

Figure 5-150:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-234
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

3. Select the First Device (disk) and


from the Advanced menu click
Log Pages (see Figure 5-151).

First Device

Figure 5-151:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-235
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

4. The Log page for the selected device opens (see Figure 5-152).
5-116.

Figure 5-152:
5. Click Save Grown Detect List to save to the log file the list of all bad sectors found during the operation.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-236
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

6. A note with the path of the saved log file appears on screen (see Figure 5-153).
5-117

Figure 5-153:

7. Write down the path for future use and confirm the save by clicking OK (see Figure 5-153).
8. From the Safe menu, click Select Device and repeat the steps 3 to7 for the rest of the devices (disks).
9. Open the saved log files from the directory that you recorded in step 6 and 7 (see Figure 5-154).
5-118

No. Bad Sector

Figure 5-154:

10. Read the number of bad sectors from the log file. If the number of bad sectors exceeds 25, replace the disk.
11. Close the utility.
12. Format Drive E: as described in SCSI Disk Array Configuration (IRS).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-237
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Configuring the SCSI RAID to Five Disks


1. Disconnect the suspected faulty SCSI disk from the RAID by disconnecting the power or data cable.
2. Re-configure the SCSI RAID Disk at the BIOS and Windows level (follow the instructions in SCSI Disk Array Configuration
(IRS)).

Formatting the SCSI Hard Disk

NOTE:
Before you format or replace a disk:
Check with the customer regarding needed Raw files.
Backup the file _IRS_Startup.raw to a temporary directory for restore after format.
After you format a disk:
Manually restore the file _IRS_Startup.raw to the E:\Raws directory.
Install the Reference Raw file from the software installation disk.

1. Turn the IRS OFF and then turn IRS ON.


2. When the message "Spinning SCSI Device" appears on the screen, press Ctrl + M. The MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility
window appears with the Management menu (see Figure 5-155).
3. Select Configure and press <Enter>. The Configure menu appears (see Figure 5-156).
4. Select Clear Configuration (use the arrow keys) and press <Enter>.
5. When prompted, press Yes to clear configuration. Press <Enter> to confirm.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-238
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5-119 5-120

Figure 5-156: Clear Configuration Option

Figure 5-155:

6. Press Esc to return to the Management menu. Press Format.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-239
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

7. The Physical Drive menu opens (Figure 5-157).


8. Press the SPACEBAR to select the drive that you wish to
format. The selected drive blinks.
9. Press F10 to format the selected drive and press Yes to
confirm. Drive format takes 1015 minutes.
10. When format is complete, press any key to continue and
then press Esc to return to the Management menu.
11. Re-configure the SCSI RAID Disk at the BIOS and Windows
level (follow the instructions in Section SCSI Disk Array
Configuration (IRS).
12. After disk configuration, copy the raw file from Drive D to the
E:\Raws directory.

Figure 5-157:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-240
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

IRS Computer Parts Replacement

Overview
The IRS Computer has the following FRUs (Field Replaceable Units):
1. 1-Gbit/sec LAN Card (Replacing the 1-Gbit/sec LAN Card)
2. Back Projection (BP) Card (Replacing the Back Projection (BP) Card)
3. Acquisitor (ACQ) Card (Replacing the Acquisitor (ACQ) Card)
4. SCSI Controller (Replacing the SCSI Controller)
5. SCSI Array Disk (Replacing the SCSI Array Disk)
6. Hard Disk (Replacing the System Hard Disk)
7. ON/OFF Switch (Replacing the ON/OFF Switch)
8. Fan (Replacing the Fan)

Computer Safety
Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer system from potential damage and to ensure your own
personal safety.

CAUTION
TO ENSURE FOR SAFETY, TURN OFF THE UPS (INSIDE THE PDC) BY PRESSING THE
ON / OFF PUSH BUTTON AND DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE (FROM THE
PDC) FROM THE RACK COMPUTER.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-241
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

When Working Inside Your Computer


Before you open the computer cover, perform the following steps in the sequence indicated.

NOTE:

Do not attempt to service the computer yourself, except as explained in the Service Manual
on-line Dell documentation or otherwise provided to you. Always follow installation and service
instructions closely.

CAUTION
THERE IS A DANGER OF A NEW BATTERY EXPLODING IF IT IS INCORRECTLY
INSTALLED. REPLACE THE BATTERY ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE
RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISCARD USED BATTERIES ACCORDING
TO THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS.

1. Turn OFF the computer and any peripherals.


Disconnect your computer and devices from their power sources. Also, disconnect any telephone or network lines from
the computer. Doing so reduces the potential for personal injury or shock.
2. Wear a wrist grounding strap, and clip it to an unpainted metal surface, such as the padlock loop on the back of the chassis
(see Figure 5-25). If a wrist grounding strap is not available, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on
the chassis, such as the power supply, to discharge any static charge from your body before touching anything inside your
computer.
While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis to dissipate any static electricity
that might harm internal components. Also avoid touching components or contacts on a card and avoid touching pins on
a chip.
3. Disconnect your computer and peripherals from their power sources.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-242
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Before disconnecting a peripheral device from the computer, wait 10 to 20 seconds after disconnecting the computer from
its electrical outlet. Before removing a component from the system board, verify that the standby power light on the
system board has turned off. To locate this light, see "System Board Components" or "Interior Service Label" in the Dell
Service Manual.
In addition, take note of these safety guidelines when appropriate:
When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain- relief loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have
a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before disconnecting
the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you
connect a cable, make sure both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned.
Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges
or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a microprocessor chip by its edges, not by its pins.

Protecting Against ESD Anti-static Discharge


Static electricity can harm delicate components inside your computer. To prevent static damage, discharge static electricity from
your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components, such as the microprocessor. You can do so by
touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
As you continue to work inside the computer, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to remove any static charge your
body may have accumulated.
You can also take the following steps to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD):
When unpacking a static-sensitive component from its shipping carton, do not remove the component from the antistatic
packing material until you are ready to install the component in your computer. Just before unwrapping the antistatic
packaging, be sure to discharge static electricity from your body.
When transporting a sensitive component, first place it in an antistatic container or packaging.
Handle all sensitive components in a static-safe area. If possible, use antistatic floor pads and workbench pads.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-243
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Logout and Shutdown Procedure


When performing parts replacement on the IRS computer, log OFF from the Host and IRS computers and shutdown the power
as follows:

Host Computer
1. Open the Archive Manager.
2. Click File | Logout.
3. From the Logout window, click Shut Down, select Shut Down and click OK.
4. Press Ctrl twice to switch to the IRS computer.

IRS Computer
1. Close Master.exe.
2. Select Start | Shut Down and click OK.

Turn OFF Power


1. Turn OFF the ON/OFF switch on the Computer Rack door.
2. Turn OFF the output power from the UPS by pressing on OFF push button.
3. Turn OFF the on-site power switch.

WARNING
BEFORE YOU BEGIN ANY OF THE PROCEDURES IN THIS SECTION, FOLLOW THE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SAFETY
CHAPTER OF THE SERVICE MANUAL.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-244
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

WARNING
TO GUARD AGAINST ELECTRICAL SHOCK, ALWAYS UNPLUG YOUR COMPUTER FROM THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET BEFORE
OPENING THE COVER.
BEFORE REMOVING A COMPONENT FROM THE SYSTEM BOARD, VERIFY THAT THE STANDBY POWER LIGHT ON THE
SYSTEM BOARD HAS TURNED OFF.

Login and Startup Procedure


Perform this procedure when restarting the system after replacing any part.
1. Turn ON the on-site power switch.
2. Turn ON the UPS using the ON push button.
3. Turn ON the STBY/ON switch on the Scan Control Box.
4. Turn ON the IRS from the ON/OFF switch and wait until the Master.exe starts up.
5. Press <Ctrl> twice to switch to the Host computer.
6. Turn ON the Host.
7. Log in as mxservice (password service_only).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-245
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Opening the IRS Top Cover

CAUTION
MOVING THE IRS COMPUTER WHILE THE POWER IS ON DAMAGES THE DISK DRIVES.
YOU MUST TURN THE POWER OFF AND WAIT 30 SECONDS BEFORE PULLING OUT
THE IRS TRAY FROM THE COMPUTER RACK.

1. Open the door of the Host Rack and slide out the IRS computer.
2. Disconnect the cables from the IRS rear panel.
3. Rotate the computer clockwise so the IRS top cover will be in the "up direction.
4. Release the two IRS cover screws and remove the left side cover (see Figure 5-158).
5. Remove the pink foam (see Figure 5-159).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-246
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5-121 5-122

Top Cover Screws


Pink
Foam

Figure 5-158: IRS Top Cover Screws Figure 5-159: IRS with Cover Open

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-247
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Closing Cover / Switching ON System


1. Set the pink foam as shown in Figure 5-160.
2. Return the IRS top cover to its place and secure with two Pink
of the cover screws (Figure 5-160). Foam
3. Open the door of the Host Rack and put the IRS on the
extension shelf.
4. Re-connect all cables that were disconnected in the
previous step and slide the IRS into the Host Rack.
5. Switch ON the output power from the UPS by pressing the
ON button.
6. Switch ON the ON/STBY switch on the CT Box.
7. Switch ON the IRS Computer and wait for the Master.exe
application to be activated.
8. Switch ON the Host Computer and logon as an mx user ID
(no password required).
9. Run a few scans to verify proper operation of the system. SCREWS

Figure 5-160: Closing IRS Cover

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-248
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Replacing the 1-Gbit/sec LAN Card

CAUTION
MOVING THE IRS COMPUTER WHILE THE POWER IS ON DAMAGES THE DISK DRIVES.
YOU MUST TURN THE POWER OFF AND WAIT 30 SECONDS BEFORE PULLING OUT
THE IRS TRAY FROM THE COMPUTER RACK.

1. Follow the ESD Anti-Static safety procedures (Protecting


Against ESD Anti-static Discharge).
2. Follow the procedure described in Opening the IRS Top
Cover.
3. Disconnect the 1-Gbit LAN cable (Host communication)
from the 1-Gbit LAN card on the rear panel (Figure 5-162).
4. Remove the screw of the old 1-Gbit LAN card (Figure
5-162).
5. Using the ESD Anti-Static kit with the anti-static wrist strap
(see Computer Safety ), slide out the card from the slot and
insert into the anti-static bag.

Figure 5-161: 1-Gbit LAN card, pulled out from slot.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-249
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5-123.

5-124 5-125

Screw
Anti-static wrist strap

1-Gbit LAN Jack 1-Gbit LAN Card

Figure 5-162: 1-Gbit LAN Card - top view Figure 5-163: Sliding out 1-Gbit LAN Card, using the
anti-static wrist strap

6. Slide the new 1-Gbit LAN card into the same slot and tighten the screw.
7. Plug in the 1-Gbit LAN cable (Host communication).
8. Close the top cover, slide the IRS back into the Rack, and switch ON the system (see Closing Cover / Switching ON
System ).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-250
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Replacing the Back Projection (BP) Card

NOTE:
Before replacing the BP card, run the BP Card Tests: Short and Long to confirm replacement of
the card.

CAUTION
MOVING THE IRS COMPUTER WHILE THE POWER IS ON DAMAGES THE DISK DRIVES.
YOU MUST TURN THE POWER OFF AND WAIT 30 SECONDS BEFORE PULLING OUT
THE IRS TRAY FROM THE COMPUTER RACK.

NOTE:
Follow ESD Anti-Static safety procedures (see Protecting Against ESD Anti-static Discharge )

1. Follow the procedure described in Opening the Computer Cover.


2. Disconnect the 3.3v Power supply cable from the BP card (see
Figure 5-165).

Figure 5-164: Back Projection Card

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-251
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

3. In systems where the IRS Boards


Anchoring kit was installed (FCO 3.3V Power
#7280131), release the bracket Supply
screws and carefully remove the Connection
front and rear anchoring brackets
or if not,
release the screw of the BP card Screw
(Figure 5-165).
4. Using the ESD Anti-static kit with
the anti-static wrist strap, slide out Slide track
the card from the slot (Figure 5-165)
and place it in the anti-static bag.
5. Slide in the new BP card in the
same slot.

Figure 5-165: Removal of the Back Projection Card

6. In systems where the IRS Boards Anchoring kit was installed (FCO #7280131), replace the front and rear anchoring
brackets and tighten the bracket screws
or if not
tighten the screw that secures the BP card.
7. Plug-in the 3.3v Power supply cable (Figure 5-165).
8. Close the top cover, slide the IRS back into the Rack, and switch ON the system (see Closing Cover / Switching ON
System ).
9. Follow the procedure described in BP Card Tests: Short and Long.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-252
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Replacing the Back Projection (BP) Card for IRS Pentium 4


The BP board and the ACQ board are situated in DC to DC converter BP Board
neighboring slots in the IRS Pentium 4 computer. The
new BP board has an DC to DC converter piggy-back
board that protrudes and comes very close to a large
diode on the ACQ board.
If either board is inserted incorrectly the board will be
damaged (see Figure 5-166).
ACQ
Board

Diode on
ACQ

Figure 5-166: ACQ and BP Boards Close Proxim-


ity

10. Follow Anti-static safety procedures (see Computer Safety ).


11. Follow the procedure described in Opening the IRS Top Cover.
12. Disconnect the 3.3v Power supply cable from the BP card (see Figure 5-165).
13. In systems where the IRS Boards Anchoring kit was installed (FCO #7280131), release the bracket screws and carefully
remove the front and rear anchoring brackets
or if not,
release the screw that secures the the ACQ board and remove the board.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-253
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

14. If you have already removed the IRS Boards Anchoring brackets, remove the BP board
or if not,
release the screw that secures the BP board to the IRS (see Figure 5-167) and remove the board.
5-126

Remove screw
BP
board

ACQ
board

Figure 5-167:

15. Insert the new BP board.


16. Insert the existing ACQ board. Take special care not to let the two boards touch one another.
17. In systems where the IRS Boards Anchoring kit was installed (FCO #7280131), replace the front and rear anchoring
brackets and tighten the bracket screws
or if not
tighten the screw that secure both BP and ACQ boards to the IRS.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-254
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

NOTE:
Take special care to keep the boards separated. Do not let any component on one board
touch a component on the other board.

18. Close the IRS cover.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-255
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Replacing the Acquisitor (ACQ) Card

CAUTION
MOVING THE IRS COMPUTER WHILE THE POWER IS ON DAMAGES THE DISK DRIVES.
YOU MUST TURN THE POWER OFF AND WAIT 30 SECONDS BEFORE PULLING OUT
THE IRS TRAY FROM THE COMPUTER RACK.

NOTE:
Before replacing the ACQ card (Figure 5-168), run the to confirm replacement of the card.

1. Follow the ESD Anti-Static safety procedures (see Protecting


Against ESD Anti-static Discharge ).
2. Follow the procedure described in Opening the Computer
Cover.

Figure 5-168: The ACQ Card

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-256
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

3. Disconnect the ACQ Fiber Optic cable and ACQ


Control cable on the rear panel (see Figure 5-106
and Figure 5-111).
4. In systems where the IRS Boards Anchoring kit
was installed (FCO #7280131), release the
bracket screws and carefully remove the front and Screw
rear anchoring brackets
or if not,
release the screw that secures the old ACQ card
(Figure 5-169).
5. Using the ESD Anti-Static kit with the anti-static
wrist strap, slide out the card from the slot
(Figure 5-169) and place it in the anti-static bag.
6. Slide the new ACQ card into the same slot.

NOTE:
Take special care not to let the ACQ and BP boards Figure 5-169: Removing the ACQ Card
touch one another..

7. In systems where the IRS Boards Anchoring kit was installed (FCO #7280131), replace the front and rear anchoring
brackets and tighten the bracket screws
or if not
tighten the screw that secures the ACQ board to the IRS.Re-connect the ACQ Fiber Optic cable and ACQ Control cable
(on the rear panel) to the ACQ card.
8. Close the top cover, slide the IRS back into the Rack, and switch ON the system (see Closing Cover / Switching ON
System ).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-257
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Replacing the SCSI Controller

NOTE:
Before replacing the SCSI Controller card, run the SCSI (Long SCSI) Diagnostic Test. It is
recommended to replace the SCSI Controller if the SCSI test failed AND you replaced SCSI
disk AND the problem still exists.

CAUTION
MOVING THE IRS COMPUTER WHILE THE POWER IS ON DAMAGES THE DISK DRIVES.
YOU MUST TURN THE POWER OFF AND WAIT 30 SECONDS BEFORE PULLING OUT
THE IRS TRAY FROM THE COMPUTER RACK.

1. Follow the ESD Anti-Static safety procedures (see Protecting Against


ESD Anti-static Discharge ).
2. Follow the procedure described in Opening the Computer Cover.

Figure 5-170: The SCSI Controller Card

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-258
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

3. First mark the SCSI connection cables


(Channel-1 and Channel-2) and then disconnect Channel-1 Channel-2
them from the SCSI Controller card (Figure
5-171).
4. Remove the screw of the SCSI Controller card
(Figure 5-171).
5. Using the ESD Anti-static kit with the anti-static Screw
wrist strap, slide out the card from the slot (Figure
5-171) and place it in the anti-static bag.
6. Slide the new SCSI Controller card back into the
same slot and tighten with the screw.
7. Reconnect the SCSI cables (Channel-1 and
Channel-2).
8. Close the top cover, slide the IRS back into the
Rack, and switch ON the system (see Closing
Cover / Switching ON System ).
9. Configure the SCSI Array disk as described in the
procedure in SCSI Disk Array Configuration Figure 5-171: The SCSI Controller Card
(IRS).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-259
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Replacing the SCSI Array Disk

NOTE:
Before replacing one of the SCSI Array disks, run the and SCSI (Long SCSI) Diagnostic Test.
Replace the faulty disk, according to test's results. Confirm replacement of the right disk; follow
the connection (channel) on the SCSI Controller (see Figure 5-171).

5-127

5-128 5-129

Channel-1 Channel-2 Disk CH-1 ID-1


Disk CH-1 ID-2
Disk CH-1 ID-3

Disk CH-2 ID-1


Disk CH-2 ID-2
Disk CH-2 ID-3

Figure 5-173: SCSI Disk Channels

Figure 5-172: SCSI Array Disk

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-260
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

1. Follow the ESD Anti-Static safety procedures (see Protecting Against ESD Anti-static Discharge ).

CAUTION
MOVING THE IRS COMPUTER WHILE THE POWER IS ON DAMAGES THE DISK DRIVES.
YOU MUST TURN THE POWER OFF AND WAIT 30 SECONDS BEFORE PULLING OUT
THE IRS TRAY FROM THE COMPUTER RACK.

2. Remove the two secure screws of the SCSI Array channel-1/ 2 (according to the disk you would like to replace), located
on the front panel (Figure 5-173).
3. Slide out the SCSI disks, disconnect from the SCSI
disk array all the cables (data & power)
(Figure 5-174) and set the SCSI package on an
anti-static mat.

SCSI Disk
Array

Figure 5-174: Removing the SCSI Array Disk

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-261
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

4. Remove two screws on each side (total of


four) of the faulty SCSI disk (Figure 5-175)
5. Take out the old defective SCSI disk from
the SCSI disk Array and remove the ID Secure
jumper located on the front of the disk Screws
(Figure 5-176 and Figure 5-177).

Figure 5-175: Removing the SCSI Array Disk

5-130

ID Jumper ID Jumper

Figure 5-176: ID Jumper Location Figure 5-177: ID Jumper (Detail)

6. Replace the ID jumper on the new SCSI disk, insert in the array and tighten the four screws removed previously (see
Step 4 on page 5-262).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-262
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

7. Re-connect all the cables (data & power) that were disconnected (see Step 3 on page 5-261).
8. Slide the SCSI disk array back into the IRS and secure the pack with the two screws that released at the start (see Step 2
on page 5-261).
9. Switch on the system (see Closing Cover / Switching ON System ).
10. Configure the SCSI Array disk as follows:
Create a directory: E:/RAWS.
Copy the IRS_Startup.raw file to this directory.
Install the Reference RAWS CD from the software package.
(Procedure described in SCSI Disk Array Configuration (IRS).)

NOTE:
In case you do not have a replacement disk, re-configure the IRS to work with one disk less
(minimum can be four) until you will acquire a good disk for replacement.

Please be aware that less disks affects the performance of the IRS (slow reconstruction process).

NOTE:
After re-configuration of the SCSI disk Array, the stored RAW data will disappear.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-263
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Replacing the System Hard Disk

NOTE:
The Hard Disk should be replaced only when it has defective sectors (can not read/write to a
file) or it has an IRS bootable problem and you are unable to reload the Software.

1. Follow the ESD Anti-Static safety procedures (see Protecting Against ESD Anti-static Discharge ).

CAUTION
MOVING THE IRS COMPUTER WHILE THE POWER IS ON DAMAGES THE DISK DRIVES.
YOU MUST TURN THE POWER OFF AND WAIT 30 SECONDS BEFORE PULLING OUT
THE IRS TRAY FROM THE COMPUTER RACK.

2. Remove two screws securing the Bottom Array located on the front panel.
3. Slide out the Array (Figure 5-178), disconnect the data and power cables from the Hard disk (Figure 5-179).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-264
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5-131

5-132 5-133

Data Cable Power Cable

SCSI Disk
Array

Figure 5-178: Removing the Hard Disk Figure 5-179: Power and Data cables

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-265
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

4. Remove two screws on each side (total of four) of the hard Secure
disk (Figure 5-180) and remove the defective hard disk from Screws
the Array.
5. Remove the ID jumper from the defective hard disk (located
on the rear of the disk) (see Figure 5-181) and install on new
disk
6. Insert into the array the Hard disk and secure with the four
screws that were removed previously (Step 4).
7. Re-connect all the cables (data and power) disconnected in
Step 3.

Figure 5-180: Securing Screws


8. Slide the Array into the IRS and secure the pack with the two
screws that released at the start Step 2.
9. Close the top cover, slide the IRS back into the Rack, and ID
switch ON the system (see Closing Cover / Switching ON Jumper
System ).
10. Reload the software on the IRS using the current on-site
software version.
11. During bootup, press F2 to enter BIOS setup.
12. Select the Boot menu.
13. Open Hard Drive. Verify the following:
Hard Disk: ST340016A-(PM) is in the first position
SCSI: PCI RAID Adapter (bus 03 dev 00) is after the
hard disk
Figure 5-181: ID Jumper on Hard Disk
14. Press F10 to save the settings and exit from the BIOS setup.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-266
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Replacing the ON/OFF Switch


1. Follow the ESD safety procedures (see Protecting Against ESD Anti-static Discharge ).

CAUTION
MOVING THE IRS COMPUTER WHILE THE POWER IS ON DAMAGES THE DISK DRIVES.
YOU MUST TURN THE POWER OFF AND WAIT 30 SECONDS BEFORE PULLING OUT
THE IRS TRAY FROM THE COMPUTER RACK.

2. Follow the procedure described in Opening the Computer Cover.


3. Disconnect the ON/OFF switch cable from the on-board connector (pins 6 and 7)(Figure 5-182).
4. Remove the ON/OFF switch cable from the tie wraps (Figure 5-182 and Figure 5-183).
5-134

Secure Tie Wrap ON/OFF Connector Tie Wrap

Figure 5-182: ON/OFF Connector Figure 5-183: ON/OFF Switch cable Tie Wrap

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-267
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5. Release the ON/OFF switch by pressing from inside the IRS on the clips
holding the switch (Figure 5-184)
6. Remove the ON/OFF switch and replace with new switch.
7. Re-connect the ON/OFF switch connector to the same connector pins
(pins 6 and 7) and secure with tie-wraps
8. Close the top cover, slide the IRS back into the Rack, and switch ON the
system (see Closing Cover / Switching ON System ).

Figure 5-184: Removing the ON/OFF

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-268
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Replacing the Fan


1. Follow the ESD safety procedures (see Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge).

CAUTION
MOVING THE IRS COMPUTER WHILE THE POWER IS ON DAMAGES THE DISK DRIVES.
YOU MUST TURN THE POWER OFF AND WAIT 30 SECONDS BEFORE PULLING OUT
THE IRS TRAY FROM THE COMPUTER RACK.

2. Follow the procedure described in Opening the Computer Cover.


3. Mark on the electronic board the three fans ID for future proper connection, and disconnect the fan cables from the board
(Figure 5-185).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-269
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

4. Cut the tie wraps and release the fan cables (Figure 5-185 and Figure 5-186).
5-135 5-136

Tie Wrap

Tie Wrap

Figure 5-185: Fan Connectors Figure 5-186: Fan cables tie wraps

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-270
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

5. Unscrew the screws securing the three fans and remove


the fans (Figure 5-187).
6. Replace with new fans and secure them with the screws
removed previously.
7. Plug the fan cables into the connectors on the small
electronic board and secure the cables with the tie wraps.
8. Close the top cover, slide the IRS back into the Rack, and
switch ON the system (see Closing Cover / Switching ON
System ).

Figure 5-187: Fan screws

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-271
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Replacing the Battery


The following symptoms indicate battery failure and require battery replacement:
Black screen on the IRS computer with or without audible beeps
BIOS setup changes
BIOS language changes
Missing O/S message at bootup

Procedure

CAUTION
MOVING THE IRS COMPUTER WHILE THE POWER IS ON DAMAGES THE DISK DRIVES.
YOU MUST TURN THE POWER OFF AND WAIT 30 SECONDS BEFORE PULLING OUT
THE IRS TRAY FROM THE COMPUTER RACK.

1. Follow the ESD safety procedures (see Computer Safety ).


2. Open the cover, as described in Opening the IRS Top Cover.
3. Disconnect the 3.3V Power supply cable from the BP card Figure 5-165.

NOTE:
For systems where the IRS card anchoring kit is installed, follow the procedure in
FCO 72800131 for anchoring kit removal and assembly.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-272
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

4. Remove the BP card (follow the removal procedure in section Replacing the Back Projection (BP) Card.
5. Remove the ACQ card (follow the removal procedure in section Replacing the Acquisitor (ACQ) Card.
6. Disconnect the power cable from the IRS.
7. Turn on the IRS once to discharge the residual power supply still left in the IRS.
8. Use a blunt non-conductive instrument to lift the battery from the IRS motherboard.
Pentium 3 Motherboard (see Figure 5-188).
Pentium 4 Motherboard (see Figure 5-189).
9. Replace the battery with new one.
10. Connect the power cables.
11. Reset the BIOS settings. Follow the procedure according to the systems motherboard:
Resetting the Pentium 3 Motherboard BIOS
Resetting the Pentium 4 Motherboard BIOS
5-137 5-138

Figure 5-188: Figure 5-189:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-273
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Resetting the Pentium 3 Motherboard BIOS


Reset the motherboard BIOS as follows:

1. Remove the yellow plastic PCB.


5-139

2. Transfer the jumper displayed in


Figure 5-190 from position Spare
Jumper to position CMOS Clear.
3. Turn ON the IRS (see Login and
Startup Procedure ) and wait for
the message
"8150: NVRAM Cleared by
jumper".
4. Turn OFF the IRS computer.
5. Return the jumper from position
CMOS Clear to its original position
Spare Jumper.
6. Return the yellow plastic PCB to its
slot and close the IRS cover.

Figure 5-190:

7. Turn ON the IRS (see Login and Startup Procedure ) and press F2 to enter the BIOS setup.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-274
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

NOTE:
If you get a message when you power up the IRS (Step 3) requesting a password, turn OFF the
IRS, move the jumper from CMOS Clear position to Password Disable, power up the IRS
again, and continue from Step 4 above.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-275
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Pentium 3 Motherboard BIOS Settings


Set up the BIOS according to the following screens.

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility


Main Advanced Security Server Boot Exit

System Time: [15:25:18]


System Date: [12/12/2004

Legacy Floppy A: [1.44/1.25 MB 3.5"]


Legacy Floppy B: [Disabled]

Hard Disk Pre-Delay: [Disabled]


Primary IDE Master [40021MB]
Primary IDE Slave [CD-ROM]
Secondary IDE Master [None]
Secondary IDE Slave [None]

Processor Settings

Language:[English [(US)]

F1 HELP Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Default


ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub-Menu F10 Save and Exit

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-276
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility


Main Advanced Security Server Boot Exit

Memory Configuration
PCI Configuration
I/O Device Configuration
Advanced Chipset Control

Boot-time Diagnostic Screen: [Enabled]

Reset Configuration Data [No]


Installed O/S: [Other]

Numlock: [Off]
Memory/Processor Error [Boot]

F1 HELP Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Default


ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub-Menu F10 Save and Exit

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-277
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility


Main Advanced Security Server Boot Exit

User Password Is: Clear


Supervisor Password Is: Clear
Set User Password [Enter]
Set Supervisor Password [Enter]

Password on Boot: [Disabled]


Fixed disk boot sector: [Normal]

Security Mode Timer: [2 hr]


Hot Key (CTRL+ALT+): [L]
Secure Mode Boot: [Disabled]
Video Blanking: [Disabled]
Floppy Write Protect: [Disabled]

Power Switch Inhibit: [Disabled]

F1 HELP Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Default


ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub-Menu F10 Save and Exit

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-278
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility


Main Advanced Security Server Boot Exit

System Management
Console Redirection
Service Partition Type 12
Clear Event Log: [Press Enter]
Assert NMI on PERR: [Disabled]
Assert NMI on SERR: [Enabled]
FRB-2 Policy [Disable Immediately]
Thermal Sensor: [Enabled]
BMC IRQ: [11]
Post Error Pause [Enabled]
AC-LINK: [Power on]
Floppy Write Protect: [Disabled]

Platform Event Filtering [Disabled]

F1 HELP Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Default


ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub-Menu F10 Save and Exit

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-279
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility


Main Advanced Security Server Boot Exit

CD-ROM Drive
+Removable Devices
+Hard Drive
IBA 4.0.19 Slot 0003
IBA 4.0.19 Slot 0004

F1 HELP Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Default


ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub-Menu F10 Save and Exit

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-280
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility


Main Advanced Security Server Boot Exit

CD-ROM Drive
+Removable Devices
-Hard Drive
ST340016A-(PM)
Bootable Add-in Cards
PCI RAID Adapter (bus03 dev 00)

F1 HELP Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Default


ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub-Menu F10 Save and Exit

8. Press F10 to save and exit the BIOS setup. While the IRS is booting up, turn the power OFF.
9. Proceed to section Final Steps.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-281
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Resetting the Pentium 4 Motherboard BIOS


Reset the motherboard BIOS as follows:
1. Make sure that power to the IRS is OFF. Do not turn ON power to the IRS until the end of this section as instructed.
2. Remove the yellow plastic PCB.
3. Transfer the jumper displayed in Figure 5-191 from position Reserved to position Clear CMOS.
5-140

1 2 Clear Password

3 4 Recovery Mode

5 6 Clear CMOS

7 8 BIOS Boot Block Protect

9 10 Reserved

Figure 5-191:

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-282
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

4. Wait a few seconds and then return the jumper from position Clear CMOS to its original position Reserved.
5. Return the plastic PCB to its slot and close the IRS cover.
6. Turn ON the IRS (see Login and Startup Procedure ) and press F2 to enter the BIOS setup.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-283
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Pentium 4 Motherboard BIOS Settings


Configure the BIOS settings according to the following screens:

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility


Main Advanced Security Power Boot Exit

System Time: [15:25:18]


System Date: [12/12/2004

Legacy Floppy A: [1.44/1.25 MB 3.5"]

Primary Master [40021MB]


Primary Slave [CD-ROM]
Secondary IDE Master [None]
Secondary IDE Slave [None]

Processor Settings

Language:[English [(US)]

F1 HELP Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Default


ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub-Menu F10 Save and Exit

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-284
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility


Main Advanced Security Server Power Boot Exit

I/O Device Configuration


OnBoard Devices
PCI Configuration
Server Menu
Console Redirection
Event Logging
Hardware Monitor
Installed O/S: [NT4]
NT Installation Workaround [Enabled]
Boot-Line Diagnostic Screen [Disabled]
Reset Configuration Data [No]
Large Disk Access Mode [DOS]
PS/2 Mouse [Auto Detect]
Summary Screen [Disabled]
Hyper-Threading [Disabled]

F1 HELP Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Default


ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub-Menu F10 Save and Exit

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-285
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility


Main Advanced Security Server Power Boot Exit

I/O Device Configuration

Serial port A: [Enabled]


Base I/O address: [3F8]
Interrupt: [IRQ 4]
Serial port B: [Enabled]
Base I/O address: [2F8]
Interrupt: [IRQ 3]
Parallel port: [Enabled]
Mode: [ECP]
Base I/O address: [378]
Interrupt: [IRQ 7]
DMA channel: [DMA 3]
Floppy disk controller: [Enabled]

F1 HELP Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Default


ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub-Menu F10 Save and Exit

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-286
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility


Main Advanced Security Server Power Boot Exit

OnBoard Devices

Onboard Serial ATA: [Disabled]


Onboard NIC 1: [Disabled]
Onboard NIC 2 (bit): [Enabled]
Onboard VGA Behavior: [Single]
Onboard USB 1.1: [Disabled]

F1 HELP Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Default


ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub-Menu F10 Save and Exit

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-287
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility


Main Advanced Security Server Power Boot Exit

Power Loss Control [Stay Off]


Power Button [Enabled]

F1 HELP Select Item -/+ Change Values


F9 Setup Default
ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub-Menu
F10 Save and Exit

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-288
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility


Main Advanced Security Server Power Boot Exit

CD-ROM Drive
+Removable Devices
+Hard Drive
Network Boot
IBA 1.1.07 Onboard NIC 2(Gbit)

F1 HELP Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Default


ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub-Menu F10 Save and Exit

7. Press F10 to save and exit the BIOS setup. While the IRS is booting up, turn the power OFF.
8. Proceed to section Final Steps.

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-289
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Computer Rack

Final Steps
1. Replace the BP and ACQ cards removed earlier.
2. Reconnect the 3.3V Power supply cable to the BP card.
3. For systems with the IRS card anchoring kit is installed, replace the front and rear brackets.
4. Close the top cover, slide the IRS back into the Rack, and switch ON the system (see Closing Cover / Switching ON
System ).

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-290
Common Console Option

The Common Console is used to execute and monitor scans.


The Common Console enables the operator to plan and execute the patient examination procedure by activating the scanning
part of the system. The Common Console acquires and stores raw data, performs real-time viewing post-processing, and
enables image reconstruction, viewing, filming and storage.
The Common Console consists of the following components:
Common Table
Host Rack
CIRS Rack
5-141

Layout with Remote CIRS

Figure 5-192: Common Console with Positioning Alternatives

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-291
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Common Console Option

Common Console Block Diagram

Figure 5-192 illustrates the schematic layout of the Common Console.


5-142

Gantry cable
D type 50 pin MCU

OPTICAL LINK

ACQ signal cable


D type 25 pin GANTRY

Scan ControlBox cable


BP BP ACQ D type 50 pin Scan Control Box

CIRS
SERVER 3 (1U-2U) SERVER 2 (2U) SERVER 1 (2U-4U)
I/O EOD Monitor cable
Gigabit Cat 5
ACQ Diag H CT Box Diag.
CD-R/WR 40M lengh Remote Monitor
Gigabit Cat 5 D type 25 pin
o option
s ACQ Diag DVD-ROM
12VDC 12V Fan cable D type 9 pin Monitor Video Amp.
Option (1U) Monitor cable CCT Monitor
Power Supply D type 9 pin t cable
Gigabit
Ca t 5

Stereophone 15M lengh option


Female Audio CT Host Monitor
12V Fan Power
cable
S Multi-Serial Dell Mouse cable Monitor

Connection Bracket
Monitor
D Port (x8) computer cable cable
D type 62 pin
B Mouse
Mouse
CAN cable cable
Fan Fan Fan D type 15 pin Keyboard
Keyboard
cable Keyboard
SW 8 port cable
Gigabit Cat5
(1U, 9" deep) Monitor Monitor Second
Cable cable Monitor
Option
CIRS Rack Host Rack LAN
Cable
LAN
Cable
LAN

Figure 5-193: Common Console Schematic Layout

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-292
Mx8000 IDT Operating Station
Service Manual Common Console Option

NOTE:
The number of servers in the CIRS depend on the option ordered:
Rapid View and CV Pro options: Two servers (S1, S2)
CV Expert option: Three servers (S1, S2, S3)

Philips Medical Systems. Confidential and Proprietary information. Refer to Title Page.

5-293
Mx8000 IDT